Muschlitz Excavating...Springfield Township High School Additions and Renovations – Phase III School District of Springfield Township Oreland, PA School District of Springfield Township

Springfield Township High School Additions and Renovations – Phase III

School District of Springfield Township Oreland, PA

School District of Springfield Township SCHRADERGROUP architecture LLC Springfield Township High School Philadelphia, Pennsylvania Additions and Renovations Phase III ADDENDUM 4- 1

A D D E N D U M 4

To: ALL BIDDERS For: Springfield Township High School Additions and Renovations – Phase III School District of Springfield Township 1801 East Paper Mill Road Glenside, PA 19038 Prepared For: School District of Springfield Township 1901 Paper Mill Road Oreland, PA 19075 Date: January 26, 2018 Notice to all Contractors bidding the renovations to the Springfield Township High School Mechanical Upgrades Phase II. This Addendum is to amend or clarify the Contract documents as follows: GENERAL

A. This Addendum constitutes part of the Project Manual and Contract. Should conflict occur between the Project Manual and items in this Addendum or between Drawings and this Addendum, the Addendum shall govern.

B. Work described in this Addendum shall be in accordance with Specifications for like

items in remainder of building and complete with all labor and materials required.

C. Bidders are requested to attach a copy of this Addendum to the Project Manual in their possession.

D. Work affected by items in this Addendum shall be appropriately adjusted to

accommodate these changes.

E. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum by inserting its number and date in the space provided in the Bid Form. Failure to do so may subject Bidder to disqualification.




F. Bid Due Date: Thursday, February 1, 2018, at 1:00 PM SPECIFICATIONS: 1.01 Table of Contents: DELETE in its entirety and REPLACE with Revised Table of Contents.

1.02 ADD Section 035416 – Self-Leveling Underlayment.

1.03 ADD Section 085670 – Sound Control Windows.

1.04 ADD Section 097200 – Digitally Printed Vinyl Wallcovering Murals.

1.05 ADD Section 102600 – Wall and Door Protection. 1.06 ADD Section 095426 – Linear Wood Ceilings.

1.07 ADD Section 275123.1 – Paging Systems.

1.08 Section 042113 – Brick Masonry: DELETE Specification in its entirety and REPLACE with Revised Specification Section 042113.

1.09 Section 074113 – Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: DELETE Specification in its entirety and REPLACE with Revised Specification Section 074113.

1.10 Sections 075200 & 075201 – Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing Hot Applied – (Base Bid an Alternate):

1. CHANGE Paragraph 2.8.B.5 TO READ:

“Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated.”

2. CHANGE Paragraph 2.8.C TO READ:

“Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slope of 1/2 inch per 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated.”

1.11 Section 076200 – Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim: CHANGE Paragraph 2.5.F TO READ:

“Metal Expansion Joints: 0.0187 inches thick, Type 304 Stainless Steel.”

1.12 Section 077253 – Snow Guards: DELETE Specification in its entirety and REPLACE with Revised Specification Section 077253.




1.13 Section 087100 – Door Hardware: DELETE Specification in its entirety and REPLACE with Revised Specification Section 087100.

1.14 Section 088000 – Glazing: DELETE Specification in its entirety and REPLACE with Revised Specification Section 088000.

1.15 Section 093013 – Ceramic Tiling: DELETE Paragraph 2.6.A in its entirety.

1.16 Section 096366 – Wood Athletic Flooring: CHANGE Paragraph 2.4.A.3 TO READ:

“Game-Line, Marker, and Graphics Paint: Industrial enamel compatible with finish coats and recommended in writing by manufacturers of finish coats, and paint for this use. Logo and text to match font, color and size of existing gym.”

1.17 Section 096510 – Vinyl Enhanced Tile Flooring: DELETE Specification in its entirety and REPLACE with Specification Section 096519 – Resilient Tile Flooring.

1.18 Section 096623 – Resinous Matrix Terrazzo Flooring:

1. CHANGE Paragraph 2.2.A.2 TO READ:

“2. Thickness: 3/8 inch nominal.”

2. CHANGE Paragraph 2.2.B.3.b TO READ:

“b. Physical Properties with Aggregates: For resin blended with Recycled Glass, ground, grouted, and cured per requirements in NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide"; comply with the following:”

3. Paragraph 2.2.B.4: ADD:

“d. All Aggregates are to be 100% Recycled Glass.”

4. CHANGE Paragraph 2.2.C TO READ:

“C. Thin-Set Divider Strips: L-type angle, 1/4 inch deep. 1. Material: Aluminum. 2. Top Width: 1/16 inch.”

5. DELETE Paragraph 2.2.F.1 in its entirety.

6. Paragraph 3.2.C: ADD:

“2. Provide Moisture Treatment at all slab-on-grade concrete. Moisture Treatment product to be per manufacturers recommendations.”




1.19 Section 097700 – Interior Wall Panel System Application: DELETE Specification in its entirety and REPLACE with Revised Specification Section 097700.

1.20 Section 098400 – Acoustic Room Components: DELETE Specification in its entirety and REPLACE with Revised Specification Section 098400.

1.21 Section 099113 – Exterior Painting: DELETE Specification in its entirety and REPLACE with Revised Specification Section 099113.

1.22 Section 099123 – Interior Painting: DELETE Specification in its entirety and REPLACE with Revised Specification Section 099123.

1.23 Section 101400 – Interior Signage: DELETE in its entirety and REPLACE with Revised Specification Section 101400 - Signage.

1.24 Section 102113 – Plastic Toilet Compartments: Paragraph 2.2.A: ADD: “Columbia” as an acceptable manufacturer.

1.25 Section 105613 – Metal Storage Shelving: DELETE Specification in its entirety and REPLACE with Revised Specification Section 105613.

1.26 Section 123216 – Plastic-Laminate-Faced Casework:

1. CHANGE Paragraph 1.2 - Summary TO READ:

“A. Section includes plastic-laminate-faced cabinets. B. Trainer’s Room 131 Taping Station Casework. C. Related Sections:

1. Division 10 Section ‘Plastic-laminate-clad Countertops’”

2. ADD Paragraph 2.2.C:

C. “Trainer Room 131 Taping Stations: Basis of Design: ProTeam by Hausmann or approved equal. Style, size and accessory options as shown on drawings.”

1.27 Section 116623 – Gymnasium Equipment: Paragraph 2.1.A: ADD: “Draper, Inc.” as

an acceptable manufacturer.

1.28 Section 265100 – Interior Lighting – DELETE Specification from Addendum No. 02 in its entirety and REPLACE with Revised Specification Section 265100. Approved substitutions as noted. Refer to specification.




1.29 Section 265600 – Exterior Lighting – DELETE Specification from Addendum No. 02 in its entirety and REPLACE with revised Specification Section 265600. Approved substitutions as noted. Refer to specification.

1.30 Section 271005 – Structured Cabling for Voice and Data - DELETE Specification in its entirety and REPLACE with Revised Specification Section 271005.

1.31 Section 123661 – Solid Surface Fabrications: CHANGE Paragraph 1.2.A.2 TO READ:

“2. Countertops: Tickets 125, Concessions 128, and Trainer 131.”

1.32 Section 064100 – Interior Architectural Woodwork: ADD Paragraph 1.2.A.2:

“2. Athletic Mailboxes.”

1.33 Section 334000 – Storm Drainage – REVISE paragraph 2.12 by adding sub-paragraph C.1 StormKeeper chambers by Lane Enterprises have been submitted as an alternative system. The product is acceptable; however, shop drawing submissions shall demonstrate the parameters identified in paragraph C.

1.34 Section 230993 – HVAC Control Sequence: Paragraph 2.14.A: REVISE paragraph to READ: “Install and wire thermostat provided by the unit manufacturer. In each area the ATC subcontractor shall provide a separate temperature sensor to monitor space temperature and generate an alarm on the BAS if temperature exceeds 80 degrees (adjustable).”

1.35 Section 230993 – HVAC Control Sequence: Paragraph 2.20: ADD sub paragraph

‘B’: “Alarming shall include (at a minimum) temperature sensors in Server Room, MDF Room, Walk-in Refrigerator, and Walk-in Freezer.”

1.36 Section 116800, Paragraph 2.5.D.4 (added by Addendum #2) DELETE “General”

and REPLACE with “Site”.

1.37 Section 011200 - Multiple Contract Summary” DELETE Paragraph 1.6EE in its entirety.

1.38 Section 011200 - Multiple Contract Summary” DELETE Paragraph 1.8A.13 in its

entirety. 1.39 Specification Section 011200 “Multiple Contract Summary”.

a. Paragraph 1.3: ADD the following:




E. Site Contractor (SC) will be the Sitework Coordinator and shall be subordinate to Project Coordinator, Site Coordinator shall be responsible for coordination between the Sitework Contract, the General Contract, the Plumbing Contract, and the Electrical Contract as they relate to Field Engineering, utility installation and relocation and other construction on site including but not limited to: Site Building construction and renovations, site lighting and athletic field lighting, site power and communications, scoreboards and site signage, sanitary sewer, storm conveyance, sidewalks and landscaping, SC shall coordinate all work in accordance with project phasing requirements and scheduled activities of Owner and all other Contractors.

b. Paragraph1.4A.1.g: DELETE the following:

ii. From Line 2: “except for the BIM model” iii. From Line 5: “of the BIM Model

c. Paragraph 1.4A: DELETE the following:

ii. Subparagraphs ‘k.’ in its entirety. iii. Subparagraphs ‘l.’ in its entirety. iv. Subparagraphs ‘m.’ in its entirety. v. Subparagraphs ‘n.1’ in its entirety. vi. Subparagraph ‘v.’: DELETE “in accordance with the Construction Waste

Management Plan in compliance with Section 017419.” vii. Subparagraphs ‘w.’ in its entirety.

d. Paragraph 1.4B.1.f: DELETE the words “BIM Model”

e. Paragraph 1.4C: ADD the following subparagraphs:

a. Coordinate installation of new utilities and/or provide information necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utilities affected by construction. Coordinate installation/relocation of utilities with Prime Contractors, Owner and utility provider. Minimize and coordinate shutdown time. Provide minimum 48-hour notice for any shutdown. Comply with Phasing Milestones and Project Schedule:

b. Coordinate installation/relocation/maintenance of NPDES Permit E&S controls and Conservation District inspections.

c. Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate any site testing and inspections, and coordinate schedule of site tests and inspections.

d. Coordinate location/relocation of Contractor staging areas, Site Security, on-site traffic and access throughout the project and in compliance with project milestones and phasing plans.

e. Coordinate location/relocation of site access and parking locations for owner staff students and contractor workmen throughout project and in compliance with project milestones and phasing plans.




f. Coordinate installation of athletic fields and adjoining equipment and structures in compliance with project milestones. Coordinate with Owner to minimize interruptions to practice and game schedules.

g. Coordinate field engineering, construction layout and location of existing permanent benchmarks and control points. (Work to be provided by GC or SC as described in Section 011500 FIELD ENGINEERING)

h. Provide field surveys of in-progress site work.

i. Site cleaning to be performed by SC shall include removal of mud and debris from all areas, and in particular, all sidewalks and streets, progress cleaning of site shall be performed on a daily basis.

f. Paragraph 1.6O: DELETE this paragraph in its entirety including all previous addendum items modifying this paragraph and REPLACE with the following:

O. Concrete Bases and Pads

i. Interior concrete bases and pads required for plumbing, fire suppression, heating, ventilation, and air conditioning, and electrical equipment shall be provided by the contractor installing the equipment unless noted otherwise.

ii. Exterior light bases, generator pad and transformer pad shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor.

iii. Exterior concrete pads and/or foundations for Site Buildings to be provided by General Contractor include the following:

1. Base Bid Varsity Softball Dugouts (2) 2. Base Bid Varsity Baseball Dugouts (2), 3. Base Bid Athletic Storage Building, 4. Base Bid Ticket Booth.

iv. Exterior concrete pads and/or foundations for Site Buildings to be provided by Site work Contractor Include the following:

1. Base Bid JV Softball Dugouts (2), 2. Base Bid JV Baseball Dugouts (2), 3. Alternate Bid Varsity Softball Dugouts (2), 4. Alternate Bid Varsity Baseball Dugouts (2), 5. Alternate Bid Ticket Booth (pad to be finished as sidewalks)

g. DELETE Paragraph 1.12A.8 in its entirety. REPLACE with the following:

8. All site preparation for installation of artificial turf surfacing as specified in section 321813.

h. Paragraph 1.12A ADD the following:




22. Exterior Scoreboards and signage: Provide and Install and/or relocate existing; including but not limited to: excavation, foundations, supports, etc. Coordinate with EC for power and controls as required.

23. All Construction work on Paper Mill Road as noted in “Drawings for Construction of Roadway/Access Improvements Associated with School District of Springfield Township-High School. TPD Job # REDG.00002” (23 Pages) Dated December 19, 2017 and distributed to Bidders in Addendum #1.

1.40 Specification Section 015000 “Temporary Facilities and Controls”. Paragraph 3.4K DELETE “SC” and REPLACE with “GC”.

1.41 Specification Section 013117B “3D Computer Model Agreement”: DELETE this section in its entirety and REPLACE with new section attached with this addendum.

1.42 Specification Section 013117C “AIA Document G202-2013 Project BIM Protocol Form”: DELETE this section in its entirety.

1.43 Specification Section 015000 “Temporary Facilities & Controls” DELETE subparagraph 1.3C.23 in its entirety and REPLACE with the following:

23. Facilities required to conduct construction waste management activities.

1.44 Specification Section 017419 “Construction Waste Management” and Specification Section 017419A “Construction Waste Management & Disposal Appendix” DELETE these sections in their entirety.

1.45 DRAWINGS: Architectural 2.01.1 Drawing AD103 & A104: DELETE Addendum No. 2 Sketch AD2-1 in its entirety.

REPLACE with Addendum Sketch AD4-4. 2.01.2 Drawing A004: Wall Type ‘U2E2’: CHANGE “(2) Layers ½” Type ‘X’ Gypsum Wall

Board” TO READ “(2) Layers 5/8” Type ‘X’ Gypsum Wall Board” 2.01.3 Drawing A121: REVISE per Addendum Sketch AD4-3.

2.01.4 Drawing A523: ADD Details 10 and 11 per Addendum Sketch AD4-5.

2.01.5 Drawing A601: DELETE in its entirety. REPLACE with Revised Drawing A601.




2.01.6 Drawing A805: REVISE Elevation – Trainer’s Room 2/A805 per Addendum Sketch AD4-2.

2.01.7 Drawing A806: DELETE in its entirety. REPLACE with Revised Drawing A806. 2.01.8 Drawing A841: REVISE TV Studio Desk Details 1, 2, & 3/A841 per Addendum Sketch

AD4-6. 2.01.9 Drawing A900: DELETE in its entirety. REPLACE with Revised Drawing A900. 2.01.10 Drawing A901: REVISE per Addendum Sketch AD4-1.

2.01.11 Drawing A901: Janitor 112C, Storage 115, Janitor 119, and Storage 122: CHANGE

Floor Finish from Epoxy Coated Concrete to VCT. See Revised Drawing A900 - Finish Schedule this Addendum.

Structural

2.02.1 Drawing S101 – Foundation Plan: DELETE note: “Recessed Conc. Slab for Vestibule

Mat.” Plumbing 2.03.1 Drawing P000 – REVISE Plumbing Demolition General Note #12 as follows:

“Removal, storage, and reinstallation of existing ceiling tiles and grids (including temporary support of sprinkler heads, lights, and other ceiling mounted devices), as required to install work of this contract, shall be performed by this contractor unless specifically noted to be removed on the Architectural plans. This contractor shall reinstall removed items to original condition and all required temporary supports shall be removed.”

Mechanical 2.04.1 Drawing M000 – REVISE Mechanical General Note #27 to READ: “Removal, storage,

and reinstallation of ceiling tiles and grids (including the temporary suspension of sprinkler heads and any ceiling mounted devices) as required to install ductwork, piping, equipment, etc. shall be performed by this contractor unless specifically noted to be removed on architectural plans.”

2.04.2 Drawing MD105 – REPLACE sheet in its entirety with attached drawing MD105. 2.04.3 Drawing MD111 – REPLACE sheet in its entirety with attached drawing MD111.




2.04.4 Drawing M103 – ADD new temperature sensor in Walk-In 140.2 and Freezer 140.3.

ADD note to new sensors to READ: “Provide a temperature sensor within refrigerator and freezer. The temperature sensor shall be hard wired to BMS to monitor temperature and generate an alarm when temperature is out of user defined range. Provide conduit and wall box with stainless steel cover plate at each location.”

2.04.5 Drawing M106 – REPLACE sheet in its entirety with attached drawing M106. 2.04.6 Drawing M108 – REVISE note to new temperature and humidity sensors in Server

Room to READ: “New temperature and humidity sensors. Generate alarm on BAS if temperature exceeds 80 degrees (adjustable).”

2.04.7 Drawing M109 – REVISE note to both ex. rooftop units above gymnasium to READ:

“Ex. rooftop unit (on roof). 7.5 HP S/A fan, 10,500 S/A CFM, 4,500 O/A CFM, 106.6 CW GPM, & 28.5 HW GPM.”

2.04.8 Drawing M111

– REVISE note to ex. rooftop unit above auditorium to READ: “Ex. rooftop unit (on roof). 10.0 HP S/A fan, 15,000 S/A CFM, 6,700 O/A CFM, 161.1 CW GPM, & 41.7 HW GPM.”

- REVISE note to ex. air handling unit on partial second floor plan to READ: “Ex. air handling unit. 5.0 HP S/A fan, 7,000 S/A CFM, 1,200 O/A CFM, 46.0 CW GPM, & 12.2 HW GPM.”

2.04.9 Drawing M112 – ADD additional new thermostat adjacent to door for DSS-2. 2.04.10 Drawing M113 – REPLACE sheet in its entirety with attached drawing M113. 2.04.11 Drawing M403 - REVISE note to ex. air handling unit to READ: “Ex. air handling unit.

1.0 HP S/A fan, 2,100 S/A CFM, 700 O/A CFM, 18.6 CW GPM, & 5.2 HW GPM.”

Electrical 2.05.1 Drawing E000 – CHANGE projector plate symbol from ‘PP’ in a square to ‘P’ in a

square. - REVISE electrical general note #15 as follows, “The E.C. shall remove and replace

64 cameras throughout the entire school as determined by the owner in addition to the quantity already shown on the drawings. PROVIDE 300’ of CAT 6 wiring for each camera data drop as required. Include as part of alternate.”

-ADD note #16 to general electrical notes as follows, “Removal, storage, and reinstallation of ceiling tiles and grids (including temporary suspension of sprinkler




heads and any ceiling mounted devices) as required to install lighting circuits, electrical devices, etc. shall be performed by this contractor unless specifically noted to be removed on Architectural plans.”

- REVISE general note #6. DELETE reference to telephone handsets. -ADD note #17 to general electrical notes as follows, “E.C. is responsible for

temporarily supporting and reinstalling any electrical devices to remain in areas where the ceiling or portions of ceiling is to be removed or lowered. This includes temporarily supporting conduit, cable, and wire. Include cost for any cutting of ceiling tiles in order to reinstall electrical devices.”

2.05.2 Drawing ED102 thru ED201 – ADD all demolitions notes from cover sheet to general

demolition notes. -ADD general demolition note as follows, “All devices noted as ‘EX.’ or not shown are

existing to remain. 2.05.3 Drawing ED104 – DELETE all fire alarm A/V devices and pull stations from this

drawing. 2.05.4 Drawing ED105 – DELETE all fire alarm A/V devices and pull stations from this

drawing. 2.05.5 Drawing ED106 – DELETE all fire alarm A/V devices and pull stations from this

drawing. -DELETE tamper switch and flow switch in exterior storage room from this drawing. 2.05.6 Drawing ED108 – ADD coded note ‘C’ to existing weight room. 2.05.7 Drawing ED109 – For clarification, ADD note “All other lighting not shown in

gymnasium is existing to remain” 2.05.8 Drawing ED114 – For clarification, only the lighting in the upper level press box is to

be demoed. All Power devices are existing to remain. 2.05.9 Drawing E101 thru E114 – ADD general lighting note #8, “E.C. is responsible for

patching ceiling where new downlights are installed to match existing surfaces. Include ‘goof’ rings where new fixture diameter is 1” smaller or less than existing fixtures. Patch ceiling where new fixture diameter is more than 1” diameter smaller than existing.”

2.05.10 Drawing E101 – For clarification, PROVIDE (1) speaker in room 132A. - REVISE gym lighting, PROVIDE (4) additional type ‘DD’ fixtures and (1) ‘GTD’ device.




- PROVIDE type ‘J’ fixture in room 134 with wall mounted occupancy sensor. Circuit to LPN1-19.

2.05.11 Drawing E107 – For clarification, PROVIDE ceiling PA speaker in room 114C. - PROVIDE (2) speakers in rooms 124 and 126. - PROVIDE (1) speaker in room 32. 2.05.12 Drawing E108 – DELETE note stating “No new work in the existing weight room” -ADD (4) type ‘CC’ fixtures and coded note ‘C.’ 2.05.13 Drawing E110 – PROVIDE ceiling mounted occupancy sensor in the following rooms:

tech, conference, (4) offices in the admin area, and (2) each in classroom 224. - ADD coded note ‘E’ to (2) occupancy sensors at bottom of entrance stairs. 2.05.14 Drawing E111 – REVISE circuiting in rooms 280, 280.1. - PROVIDE ceiling mounted occupancy sensor in storage room adjacent to corridor

261. - PROVIDE ceiling mounted occupancy sensor in rooms 280.1, 281.4 and (2) in

room 280. 2.05.15 Drawing E112 – DELETE (2) occupancy sensors and control pack from main electrical

room. - PROVIDE (1) additional occupancy sensor in rooms 213A, 213B, 220. - RELOCATE (1) new occupancy sensor in rooms 213A, 213B, 220 for adequate

sensor coverage. 2.05.16 Drawing E113 – PROVIDE ceiling mounted ultrasonic sensor and control pack in toilet

rooms 275 and 276. Remove wall mounted occupancy sensor and replace with wall switch.

2.05.17 Drawing E114 – ADD coded note ‘N’ as follows “Reconnect to new GUH using

existing circuit” - PROVIDE ceiling mounted occupancy sensor in rooms 109 and 110 in maintenance

garage. 2.05.18 Drawing E115 – Relocate (6) new occupancy sensors shown outside of pool perimeter

for future access. - ADD note as follows “All PA speakers in natatorium shall be natatorium rated (typ.)” 2.05.19 Drawing E201 – PROVIDE (1) security contact at each exterior egress door from

auxiliary gym for a total of (4). - PROVIDE (1) fire alarm pull station at each auxiliary gym exterior egress door.




- PROVIDE (2) security contacts at vestibule V101. - Circuit fire alarm extender panel to panel ‘EML’ - CHANGE IDF circuits to EML-2, and EML-3,5. 2.05.20 Drawing E202 – PROVIDE panel ‘EML’ in room 131 with 15kVA transformer mounted

above. - Split receptacle circuits in rooms 124, 126 such that each receptacle at sink has a

dedicated circuit. Circuit to panel PPN1. - Split receptacle circuits in rooms 118, 123 and circuit to panel PPN1. - In existing switchgear room 136, REVISE lighting relay panel note to state, “Provide

new Hubbell NX lighting control panel cat# NXP-32-2*-323L. Provide all required bridges and other appurtenances to incorporate with existing building Tridium system.

2.05.21 Drawing E206 – Extend Circuit from nearest receptacle to NX area controller in IDF

room adjacent to cafeteria. 2.05.22 Drawing E207 – PROVIDE twist-lock receptacle and plug for each basketball

backstop. 2.05.23 Drawing E404 – DELETE fiber optic cable from audio rack AR-1 to T.V. studio. - PROVIDE data drop at audio rack AR-1. 2.05.24 Drawing E501 – PROVIDE new 100A/3P breaker in panel ‘FHPA’ to feed panel ‘PTB’ -ADD feeder ‘8’ to feeder legend; 100A (4) #1, (1) #8 ground in 2” conduit. - CHANGE feeder for panel ‘PTB’ to type ‘8’ -CHANGE feeder for panels ‘LPN1’ and ‘BBL’ to type ‘1’ -CHANGE feeder ‘5’ to be in 1” conduit. -CHANGE feeder for panel ‘MGPL’ to type ‘4’ -For clarification max conductor length between panel ‘MGPL’ and the transformer

feeding it shall be 10’ -CHANGE MCB in panel ‘MGPL’ to be 50A/3P -REVISE ‘EM1’ and ‘EM1A’ feeder. Refer to attached drawing E501. - PROVIDE panel ‘EML’ and new 15kVA 480 3PH to 120/208V 3PH fed from a

20A/3P breaker in panel ‘EM1’ 2.05.25 Drawing E502 – For clarification, replace references to 120V electrical connection

with 277V for the gymnasium wiring diagram. 2.05.25 Drawing E503 – DELETE field lighting pole detail. 2.05.26 Drawing E602 – CHANGE panels ‘EM1’ and ‘EM1A’ to MLO. - ADD panel schedule ‘EML’




2.05.27 Drawing SE001 – For clarification, section of communications duct bank under

existing elementary parking lot is existing to remain. 2.05.27 Drawing SE005-SE006 – REVISE general note #4 to read, “All exterior wiring below

grade shall be in a minimum 1” conduit 24” below grade.” 2.05.28 Drawing SE006 – PROVIDE (1) GFI/WP duplex receptacle in each dugout. Circuit to

BBP-8. Coordinate exact location with media converters. - REVISE note at new utility pole to be “PROVIDE……. below grade. PROVIDE (3)

#4/0, (1) #3/0 ground in 4” conduit to tunnel meter. Refer to section ‘C’ this drawing”

- ADD note “PROVIDE 12 pair armored I/O plenum fiber optical cable in inner duct. Connect to existing owner owned fiber at street to MDF in server room. Verizon and Comcast to PROVIDE fiber in E.C. provided conduits.”

2.05.29 Drawing SE005 - ADD drawing note as follows, “New district fiber installation

between high school and Erdenheim elementary must be complete and fully operational prior to existing fiber getting disconnected.”

2.05.30 Drawing SE007 – Clarify football stadium scoreboard note and remove statement

“(typ. for 2).” - For clarification, panel ‘SPA’ in press box is existing to remain. -ADD drawing note as follows, “New district fiber installation must be complete and

fully operational prior to existing fiber getting disconnected.” Civil 2.06.1 Drawings C1.6 Demolition Plan – CLARIFY A quantity of trees to be relocated with

mechanical tree spade is noted on the plan. The amount is to be 80% of trees in that location.

2.06.2 Drawing C2.1, C2.2, C2.3 Site Plans – REVISE – Trash Receptacles noted on plans shall be DuMor Receptacle 152 with recycled slats, 31-gallon liner, surface mount option and BT cover option. Quantity shall be as shown on plans plus 2.

2.06.3 Drawing C2.1, C2.2, C2.3 Site Plans – REVISE – Non-Athletic benches noted on plans or not shown on plans shall be DuMor Bench model 98-80 with recycled slats, and surface mount option, blue color frames. Quantity shall be at 6 locations to be determined in field.




2.06.4 Drawing C2.1, C2.2, C2.3 Site Plans – REVISE – All site handrails for site stairs and ramps shall be aluminum as indicated in previous addenda relative to the detail. Revise any reference to painted steel or stainless-steel handrails to aluminum on the drawings as well.

2.06.5 Drawing C2.3 Site Plans – REVISE – Change concrete retaining wall noted at bottom

side of tennis courts to Redi-Rock large block retaining wall with fall protection per detail on sheet C2.4. Note that tennis court fencing shall serve as the fall protection fencing. However, the tennis court fencing shall be installed behind the top block and the gap shall be filled with pea gravel.

2.06.6 Drawing C2.4 Details – REVISE – Add the following information for cheek wall

condition shown on the concrete stair detail. The width of cheek wall shall be 8” revealed beside the steps on the top surface. The height of the cheek wall above the nosing of the steps shall be 2” as shown. The bottom of the cheek wall shown dashed beyond shall be 24” from the top surface of the cheek wall. The #4 rebars in the nosings of the stairs shall be extended into the cheek wall and turned down. Two #4 re-bars shall run the length of the cheek wall top to bottom and shall be turned down into the depth of the cheek wall.

2.06.7 Drawing C2.5 – CLARIFY – The curb retaining wall detail is not the cheek wall detail

for stairs. It is applicable to the curb condition along the bus driveway curve adjacent to the first base side of varsity baseball. Spot elevations are given on the grading plan for clarity of curb reveals required.

2.06.8 Drawing C6.4 – REVISE – Detail for concrete retaining wall as shown shall be deleted.

2.06.9 Drawing C6.4 – REVISE – Detail for Tennis Court paving shall be revised to delete the

4” perforated underdrain since the condition is on elevated ground.

2.06.10 Drawings 1 of 23 – 23 of 23 – CLARIFY – Drawings by Traffic Planning and Design (TPD) were issued in addenda #1. For clarification, the extent of the work in this bid is defined by the Limit of Work, Start Work and Stop Work points shown on the plans. Any additional extent of paint markings, etc. that may show on the plans relate to other work. Additional clarification is provided that pavement milling and overlay is a part of the work to the extents defined on sheets 7 and 8. Clarification if further provided that solid contours in the street on sheets 9 and 10 do not reflect pavement removal and replacement, it reflects milling and overlay with smooth transitions to the existing road surface. Clarification is further provided that the basic scope of work requires PennDOT traffic control, eradicating paint lines in association of the milling




and paving work, repainting of traffic control markings, signage as noted, full depth PennDOT pavement at the mouth of the new driveway, curb installation at the new driveway, curb installation to close the existing driveway to the extent shown, sidewalk installation across the mouth of the existing driveway to the extent shown. Drain lines in the street and inlets remain. Traffic light mast arm at Paper Mill and 309 remain and is outside the limit of work.

2.06.11 Drawings C6.1, C6.2, C6.3 Landscape Plans – REVISE - The extent of sod for grass athletic fields shown on the landscape plans shall be expanded to match the Phasing Plans in the following specific manner and extent: 1. Add sod throughout the extent of Varsity baseball outfield to the warning track including 5’ beyond foul lines. 2. Add sod throughout the extent of Junior Varsity baseball outfield including 5’ beyond foul lines. 3. Add sod outside the JV baseball field for the multi-purpose field overlap including to 5’ beyond the field lines shown. 4. Add sod throughout the extent of the Varsity softball outfield including 5’ beyond foul lines.

2.06.12 Drawings C8.5 PCSM Notes & Details – REVISE The Single Raintank Tank Module detail and the Double Raintank Tank Module detail have been revised to show Basin A1 as a double raintank module system. See attached sketch AD4-C01.

2.06.13 Drawing C8.5 PCSM Notes & Details – CLARIFY – The volumes for the

underground basins are as follows: Basin A1 = 48,382 CF, Basin B2 = 32,542 CF, Basin B3 = 35,259 CF, Basin B4 = 49,801 CF, and Basin B5 = 6,211 CF. The capacities include the tank volume and all stone volume below, on the sides, and above the tanks.

Fire Protection 2.07.1 Drawing FP000 – ADD Fire Protection Demolition General Note #11 as follows:

“Removal, storage, and reinstallation of existing ceiling tiles and grids (including temporary support of sprinkler heads, lights, and other ceiling mounted devices), as required to install work of this contract, shall be performed by this contractor unless specifically noted to be removed on the Architectural plans. This contractor shall reinstall removed items to original condition and all required temporary supports shall be removed.”




BIDDERS QUESTIONS: 3.01 Question: Reference dwg E114: Keyed Note “N” is shown next to all the GUH in

Maintenance Garage. There is no Keyed note “N”. Please clarify Response: Add Coded Note ‘N’ “Reconnect to new GUH using existing circuit”. 3.02 Question: Please verify that the GC will remove and reinstall the ceilings for MEP

contractors to perform their work. Response: Removal, storage, and reinstallation of ceiling tiles and grids (including

temporary suspension of sprinkler heads and any ceiling mounted devices) as required to install new light fixtures, circuits, etc. shall be performed by the E.C. unless area is specifically noted to be removed on architectural plans.

3.03 Question: There is a utility pole located at station 304, on Paper Mill Road that will

need to be relocated. It only shows up on sheet PH3A. Who is responsible to cover the cost of relocation?

Response: This cost will be covered by PECO and will be billed directly to the Owner,

Site Contractor is responsible to coordinate work with PECO. 3.04 Question: Who will be responsible to cover the cost of relocating the gas line? Response: PECO will bill district directly for relocation costs. However, trenching and

backfill is by the Site Contractor. 3.05 Question: The artificial turf surface shown in section 011200, page 15, item 8 to be

included in the SC. Please clarify. Response: Please refer to changes in language in previous Addendum. 3.06 Question: What is the definition of ‘Site Security’ in Section 015000, page 5? Are we

to include a full time security company for 24 hours-daily, 7 days a week, 21 months? Response: All security requirements are defined in section 015000, Paragraph 3.4. A

full-time security company is not required. 3.07 Question: What is the definition of “traffic surface”, as shown in section 015000, page

21, by SC?




Response: Please refer to change in Contractor in this Addendum. Traffic surface protection is by GC and refers to interior finishes.

3.08 Question: Who is responsible for the relocation of the existing, exterior score board

and for any new, exterior score boards?

Response: The Site Contractor. 3.09 Question: Who is responsible for the removal and replacement of the unsuitable soils

shown under the proposed building addition? Section 31200, page 9.

Response: The General Contractor. 3.10 Question: Who is responsible for the base bid and alternate irrigation system?

Response: The Site Contractor for a majority of work. However, the Plumbing

Contractor is responsible for any supply piping inside buildings and to a line 5’ outside of the buildings. The Electrical Contractor is responsible for providing any needed power to controls, pumps, etc.

3.11 Question: Will the team consider a two week extensions?

Response: No. 3.12 Question: Reference Note 6, dwg E000: This states to provide (2) telephone handsets.

Handsets are not being provided under the Electrical Contract. As such, there is no spec for handsets. Please provide the specs for these handsets. Response: Remove reference to Telephone Handsets in General Note #6.

3.13 Question: Reference Note 15, dwg E000: This states to provide 150’ of Cat6 cable for each of the 64 cameras in Alternate #24, Unit Price #8 for the Electrical Construction Contract states to provide 350’ of Cat6 cable for the camera. Please verify that the alternate length remains 150’ and the unit price length remains 350’. Response: Change both lengths to be 300’. Alternative Length shall be 300’ and Unit Price Length shall be 300’.

3.14 Question: Reference dwg E603: Panel “MGPL” is listed as 3 phase, 4 wire. On dwg E501, “MGPL” is being fed with (3) #1, and (1) #8. Please clarify. Response: Provide Feeder #4 for Panel ‘MGPL’.




3.15 Question: Reference the SE Drawings: There are home runs for the site lights stating

“LPN1-## via new lighting relay panel. Refer to detail on E501.” There is no such detail on E501. Is the relay panel new or existing? If new, please provide a spec for it? Response: Provide new Relay Panel in EX. Switch Gear Room 136. Panel shall be Hubbel NX Lighting Control Panel CAT #NXP-32-2*-323L. Provide all required bridges and other appurtenances to incorporate the existing building Tridium System.

3.16 Question: Reference E406 and E404/E405: These appear to be duplicate “AV” devices shown in the Aux Gym on E406 and E404. Are these the same for both or are they separate “AV” devices? Response: These are the same devices.

3.17 Question: Reference the SE Drawings: There are notes directing us to install fiber between Erdenheim Elementary, the maintenance building, and the high school. The existing underground conduits between the maintenance building and the high school are not shown. Please provide a drawings showing the route of existing conduits between the maintenance building and the high school. Also, a riser diagram of the communication system would be helpful. Please identify what cable is to be installed in duct bank C/SE006. Response: Approximate location of underground electric is shown on Drawing SE005. E.C. to field verify exact location. Refer to Addendum #3 for cable in duct bank C/SE006.

3.18 Question: Section 011200-8 para 1.6.EE. States GC is to provide louvers. Para 1.10.A.18. has the louvers by the Mechanical Contractor. There is also a louver schedule on M603 and detail on M702 says they are by mechanical. Please clarify. Response: Section 011200-8, paragraph 1.6 EE is deleted by this Addendum.

3.19 Question: GC is to install the roof curbs that are furnished by the mechanical contractor. Section 011200-9 para. 1.6.II.v. has the mechanical contractor doing the wood blocking for these curbs. Wouldn’t it make sense for the GC do the wood blocking while he is there installing the curbs so the right height is achieved? Response: Section 011200-10, paragraph 1.8A.13 is deleted by this Addendum.




3.20 Question: Numerous pieces of existing equipment are to have motors and VFD’s replaced. It indicates to replace with existing horsepower. Please provide what the horsepower and voltage of each of these existing pieces of equipment. Response: Refer to this Addendum for clarification on existing fan horsepower. All fans are 480/3/60”.

3.21 Question: Please provide the design Capacity for all Underground Basins. Response: Response included in this Addendum.

3.22 Question: Is the stone envelope storage capacity included in the calculations for Design Capacity of the Underground Basins? Response: Response included in this Addendum.

3.23 Question: Sheet C8.5 includes a table under the Single Raintank Module Detail that includes Basin A1. The table under the Double Raintank Module Detail does not include Basin A1. The Raintank Double Module Detail lists Basin A1 as a Double Raintank Module. Is Basin A1 a Double or Single Raintank Module? Response: Response included in the Addendum.

3.24 Question: Specification Section 334000 Storm Drainage Section 1.4.A.1.a references AASHTO M294. Section 1.7.A.1.a references PENNDOT Publication 408. These 2 specifications require No Recycled Prime Resin. Section 2.3.A HDPE Pipe and Fittings states that HDPE Pipe and Fittings may meet 40% Recycled Content. Which requirement governs for this pipe? Response: As stated in section 334000, paragraph 2.3 Mega Green or equal with 40% recycled content will be accepted but is not required. If submitted in the submittal process, it will not be rejected on the basis of other sections cited in the question.

3.25 Question: Sheet C4.3 shows a Trench Drain along the Tennis Court Edge. Is there a detail for this Trench Drain? Response: The trench drain detail is present on sheet C3.7

3.26 Question: Whose scope covers relocation of existing scoreboards? Whose scope covers new scoreboards?

Response: The Site Contractor.




3.27 Question: Whose scope covers the relocation of the existing Brick sign as shown on

drawing C1.5?

Response: The Site Contractor. 3.28 Question: Alternate #10 indicates a deduct for Ticket Booth construction. If the Ticket

Booth is not constructed, what would be put in its place - 6" topsoil, brick pavers and concrete sidewalk? Removing the ticket booth may be additional work for the site contractor.

Response: 6” Topsoil and stabilized lawn shall be placed in lieu of the Ticket Booth if the Ticket Booth is deducted.

3.29 Question: Reference Drawings SE006 and SE008: Can you provide the electrical

scope of work for Alternate #13? Will the prefabricated dugouts have the receptacles and Wi-Fi outlets pre-installed and pre-wired? Will the panels be pre-installed and pre-wired? The EC needs more information on this alternate in order to accurately price up this work. Response: The Alternate Dugouts are simply a series of steel posts with a cantilevered roof. The outlet/WAP in the dugouts will need to be run prior to pouring the slab and surface mounted to one of the steel posts.

3.30 Question: Reference Drawings SE005 and SE006: There are 2 field lighting control panels. Are these part of the Athletic Field Lighting package? There is no spec for control panels, Please provide specs for the control panels. Response: These panels are part of the Athletic Field Lighting package. Coordinate control panel with field lighting manufacturer.

3.31 Question: Reference 011200-1.11-A-17: This states the EC provides CAT6 and conduit for the CCTV cameras. Is this correct? IF so, is the 150’ of CAT6 for Alternate #24 as listed in Note 15/E000 and the 350’of CAT6 for Unit Price and Allowance #8 as shown on the EC Bid Form also to include conduit? Response: Yes, provide conduit.

3.32 Question: Reference SE007, SE008, and E502: The media converter calls for fiber cabling to the server. Where is the server located?




Response: The server is in the MDF room adjacent to the library. Reference drawing E208.

3.33 Question: Reference SE007: Ductbank D/SE007 is shown having power and communications going from the Fieldhouse to the Concession Stand. The communications cabling is shown but there is no power wiring shown. What are the power wire requirements for the ductbank? Where is the power being connected to in the Fieldhouse? Response: Refer to single line on E501. The feeder for panel ‘PTB’ is in the duct bank.

3.34 Question: Reference SE007: This drawing is labeling the building between Fieldhouse and the parking lot as the concession stand. The civil drawings label this building as the Ticket Booth. Which is it? If this is the Ticket Booth, does this mean that the rerouting of the fiber ductbank to the Fieldhouse is part of Alternate #10 since the rerouting will not be necessary if the Ticket Booth is not built? Response: The Ticket Booth is the Concessions Stand. Re-route ductbank as part of base bid and alternate. Duct bank also includes feeders to panels in the Field House from the High School. Coordinate exact location with civil drawings.

3.35 Question: Reference 004119-Alternate 25: Is this Temporary TV Studio also being removed as part of Alternate 25? Response: No.

3.36 Question: Reference dwgs SE005-SE008: General Note 4 states that “exterior wiring below grade shall be minimum 1” conduit encased in 3” concrete envelope a minimum of 24”below grade” Does this not include all site lighting? Response: Site lighting feeders do not need to be encased in concrete.

3.37 Question: Reference dwgs E503 and E504: Detail 3/E503 references a 70’ field lighting pole detail. Dwg E504 shows a detail for the pole foundation which is different from the detail 3/E503. Which detail is the correct one to use? Response: Delete field lighting pole detail on E503. E504 detail is for Musco reference only. If the E.C. uses another approved lighting manufacturer they must obtain signed and sealed pole foundation details.

3.38 Question: For the areas that require the EC to remove the existing light fixtures and replace them with the new light fixtures in the summer of 2018 and 2019, would it be




possible to perform this work on night shift during the school year? If so, what hours would the school be open for this work to be done? Response: E.C. may work second shift 3PM-11PM but must insure building is fully secured when they leave. Any incidents will be the responsibility of the contractor.

3.39 Question: RCP A121 shows linear metal ceiling (Armstrong Metalworks per finish schedule) in Lobby C101 and Vestibule V100. The wall section through the vestibule is 1/A405 and Lobby 3/A405. This directs you to head detail 4/A521. This detail shows you 4” metal stud framing (which conflicts with 3/A405 which shows 6” metal framing) with what appears to be the linear metal ceiling directly attached. The Armstrong Metalworks system works with its own carrier system that is to be suspended, not a direct attached system. Please Confirm: 7. The 4” metal stud framing is not required in Lobby C101 behind the linear metal

ceiling. LMC is to be suspended from the deck with its own suspension system. 8. The linear metal ceiling on the exterior canopy of Vestibule V100 is intended to be

the same material as the interior linear metal ceiling. 9. If it is the same material, the 4” metal stud framing and 5/8” plywood is not

required behind the linear metal ceiling. Response: 1. Please see this Addendum for updated Ceiling in Hall of Fame Lobby C101 and

Vestibule V100. This is a suspended system which does not require metal framing.

2. Please see this Addendum for information regarding Linear Metal Soffit. 3. Please see this Addendum for information regarding Linear Metal Soffit.

3.40 Question: There are ACT Types shown on the Reflected Ceiling plans (Ceiling Legend) that listed on the Finish Schedule. Please clarify additional ceiling types? Response: Please see Revised Drawing A900 in this Addendum.

3.41 Question: Rooms 125, 128, 131, 132, 132A for Example but they are shown differently on RCP Finish Legend. Please clarify. Response: Please see Revised Drawing A900 in this Addendum.

3.42 Question: What Tile type is to be used for type 1A and 2A on ceiling legend?




Response: Please see Revised Drawing A900 in this Addendum.

3.43 Question: Please provide information on the exterior Linear Metal Soffit Panel, no spec. found. Response: Please see Revised Specifications Section 074113 – Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels in this Addendum.

3.44 Question: What is the GC Scope of work for alternates # 26 & 26a? Response: DELETE GWB patching, finishing, and painting ceilings associated with the Electrical Contractor removing and replacing (22) luminaires of type “G”. GC work includes patching GWB up to 10 square feet in 4 separate areas (per fixture) GWB to be taped and finished to a level 4 minimum.

3.45 Question: There is a note on drawing A124 to patch and repair the ceilings in room 235, 235A, 236 and 236A. Can you specify what the current ceiling material is? Response: ACT.

3.46 Question: The finish schedule for the ceiling finished does not match with the reflected ceiling plans. Which should we follow? Response: Finish Schedule has been revised per this Addendum. Follow Finish Schedule and Specifications.

3.47 Question: Are there any finishes going in the temporary tv studio, control room, and classroom shown on drawing A811? Is there any schedule given for the windows and doors that will be going in those rooms as well? Response: No new finishes, only patch and repair as required for new construction. There is no Window Schedule for these rooms. Refer to Drawing A811. Door TV100 is included in the Door Schedule.

3.48 Question: VET-2 is listed in the finishes, but it is nowhere in the finish schedule. Should it be? Response: No. See revised Finish Schedule included in this Addendum.

3.49 Question: The floor finish plan and the finish schedule conflict with the rooms that are getting conc-1. Are these rooms to get an epoxy finish or a clear penetrating sealer?




Response: See revised Finish Schedule included in this Addendum.

3.50 Question: The casework schedule lists a #625 but I could not find it on any drawings. Is this the shelving shown in Trainer’s room, temporary AD’s office, and the temp trainer storage? Response: #625 is not in the project. Delete #625 from the Casework Schedule.

3.51 Question: Are the dugout, athletic storage building, press box, and ticket booth walls getting any painting? If so, what type exactly? Response: No.

3.52 Question: Are there downspouts at both ends of the gutter on the south elevation of the athletic storage building? Response: No, only on one side.

3.53 Question: 076200-page 7 letter F calls out for copper expansion joints A521 detail 1,2,3 call out for expansion joints to be sstl .050 Aluminum. Please clarify.

Response: Response included in this Addendum.

3.54 Question: Ref. specification section 093013, page 4, paragraph 2.4 waterproof

membrane. We believe all rooms with floor tile are over slabs on grade. Where is waterproofing required on this project? Response: Provide Waterproof Membrane at all Ceramic Floor Tile locations per specifications.

3.55 Question: Ref. 093013, page 5, paragraph 2.5, crack isolation membrane. Where is crack isolation membrane required on this project? Response: Provide Crack Isolation Membrane at all Ceramic Floor Tile locations per specifications.

3.56 Question: Ref. 093013, page 5, paragraph 2.6 Setting Materials. Thickset and thin set installation methods are mentioned but we find no depressed slabs or designated slopes to drains on the drawings. Please confirm where full mortar bed floor installations are required.




Response: Response included in this Addendum. 3.57 Question: Ref. 096623, page 3, paragraph 2.2.A.2, ¼” thickness. The terrazzo

thickness should be 3/8” thick based on the patterning shown on drawing A901. Response: Response included in this Addendum.

3.58 Question: Ref. 096623, page 4, paragraph 2.2.B.4, aggregates. We only find references to marble aggregates in the specifications. The desired samples TZ-1 through TZ-3 listed on drawing A900 consist of 100% glass aggregates (glass is a more costly than marble). Please ensure all terrazzo bidders are aware of this job requires 100% glass aggregates or confirm only marble aggregates are required on your project. Response: Response included in this Addendum.

3.59 Question: Ref. 096623, page 4, paragraph 2.2.C, Divider strips. a. See item 4 above; 3/8” thick terrazzo floors require 3/8” deep divider strips. b. We find no indications of divider strip material or width in the specifications or on

the drawings. Please confirm desired strip material and width(s). Response: Response included in this Addendum.

3.60 Question: Ref. 096623, page 5, paragraph 2.2.F, accessory strips. Terrazzo base is referenced but we find none scheduled. Is terrazzo base required on this project? Response: There is no Terrazzo Base. See further response included in this Addendum.

3.61 Question: Ref. 096623, page 6, paragraph 3.2.C, moisture testing. We note the requirement for moisture testing but find no specification for moisture treatment. Moisture treatment under epoxy terrazzo installed over slabs on grade is recommended by the NTMA. If nothing else, may we suggest a lump sum alternate or SF unit price for moisture treatment be included on the bid form so the cost is established upfront? Response: Response included in this Addendum.

3.62 Question: Ref. 224000, pages 7 & 8, paragraph 2.5 Showers. Per the descriptions for

SH-1, SH-1A and SH2A, we understand the showers and receptors will not be pre-fab units but we find no shower details. Are curbs required at the showers? Are curbs required below the panels between individual shower stalls? If required, we will assume all curb substrates are by others unless advised otherwise.




Response: No curbs are required.

3.63 Question: Ref. detail 2/A523 and locker room plans on drawings A801 – A803. We will assume no tile flooring is required under lockers in locker rooms unless advised otherwise. Response: Correct.

3.64 Question: Ref. drawings A801 – A803. Per the Room Finish Schedule on drawing A900, rooms scheduled for wall tile appear to receive partial wall tile on all (N,E, S, W) walls. We will assume the dashed-dotted or dashed only designations on these drawings show the full extent of wall tile unless advised otherwise. Response: Correct. The dashed lines on A801-A803 show the extent of partial wall tile on all wet walls.

3.65 Question: Ref. elevations on drawings A801 – A803, tile base. Tile base is scheduled in all rooms with wall tile but the elevations appear to indicate full wall tile modules at the base of walls with tile. a. Is cove tile base required on this job or is flat tile (no cove) desired for the first

course? b. No base is indicated on walls without wall tile. Is cove base required on these

walls? Response: a. Yes. Provide Cove Tile Base per Drawing A900. b. No.

3.66 Question: Ref. 8/A803, rooms 120 and 121. Per the finish schedule, both these

rooms receive partial floor and wall tile, but we find none indicated on A803 or A901. Is tile required in these two rooms? If so, please clarify extents of floor and wall tile in rooms 120 & 121. Response: There is no floor or wall tile in Rooms 120 and 121. However, there is in Room 120A and 121A.

3.67 Question: Ref. 1/A810, full height wall tile at EWC. a. What type of wall tile is desired here? b. Is wall tile only required on the back wall or on both return walls as well?




Response: a. CWT-1 as referenced on Drawing A900. b. Only on the back wall.

3.68 Question: Ref. Room Finish Schedule on A900. Room 114 is scheduled for partial floor and wall tile. We find the floor tile extent shown on A901. Please confirm the extent of wall tile in room 114. Response: Wall Tile is to be provided at the Shower Area. The same extent that Floor Tile is shown on Drawing A901.

3.69 Question: Which contract is responsible for supplying the Soccer, Lacrosse, and Field Hockey Goals? Response: Refer to Specification Section 011200 “Multiple Contract Summary” Please reference item 1.12A.12 this is the responsibility of the Site Contractor.

3.70 Question: Alternate 21 indicates that the base bid should include athletic field lighting. But this is already included in the Electrical Contractor’s scope as mentioned in the Summary of Multiple Scopes and the New Electrical Bid Form. This needs to be clarified. Response: The Electrical Contractor is responsible for installation of these items, including wiring, conduit bases, etc. It is included on the Site work Contractor Bid Form in case there is any additional coordination, General Condition, etc. associated with the EC install.

3.71 Question: Is there any signalization work that must be included at Paper Mill Road and Route 309? Response: No.

3.72 Question: Is there a quantity of crack sealing available for the area of asphalt at the existing track? Response: No.

3.73 Question: Does the Turf Contractor or Site Contractor perform the final laser grading of the Turf Field?




Response: The Site Contractor performs the final laser grading and the installation of the stone sub-base and screenings before the Turf Contractor performs final laying of turf product on the base that is to be prepared by the Site Contractor.

3.74 Question: Athletic Field Underdrains. What is the detail for the underdrain under the grass field? Is there a stone bedding layer that the underdrain sits in? Response: The AdvanEdge ADS drain is not specified to be laid in a field of stone. Storm Drainage specification, paragraph 3.5.C does require clean 2B stone in the trench that the product is laid in.

3.75 Question: Is there a detail or plan view for the underdrain for the Turf Field? It is mentioned in the Artificial Turf Surfacing specification section, but I do not see a plan view. Response: The Turf Field underdrain shall be laid in a pattern to match the layout and spacing shown on sheet C3.1 at the existing Football Stadium Field, radiating to four corners from the center point. Collect ends in an 8” header pipe to convey to the underground basis B-4. Drains shall follow the sub-base crown of the field on the surface of the geotextile fabric before placement of the stone base. Spacing of drain lines 15’ o.c. and per the Storm Drain specification, paragraph 3.5.C.

3.76 Question: Will water be made available for watering the sod at no cost from the owner if the irrigation alternate is not selected? Response: Water will be made available; however, the Contractor must provide temporary water cannon or similar watering techniques to establish the sod. Submit water method narrative in submittals.

3.77 Question: Which Prime Contractor is responsible for the concrete slabs for the dugouts? Response: The Site Contractor shall install the slabs with turned down frost footings.

3.78 Question: Sheet C2.1 details the limits of the ball stop system at the Varsity Baseball Field. The note of the drawings indicated the ball stop system is a continuous enclosure around the artificial turf field and baseball field. Does this include running the ball stop system around the outfield fence of the Baseball Field separating it from the Turf Field? Or does the ball stop system only run around the perimeter of the fields? Response: The extent of the ball stop system is intended to be the outer perimeter of the two fields without separation between the Baseball Field and the Turf Field. Note




the differing height conditions are specified. And note that fencing does separate the Baseball Field from the Turf Field as shown on the drawings.

3.79 Question: On Addendum #2, Section 116800 – Athletic Equipment and Furnishing; #5 ADD the following to Paragraph 2.5: “D” #4 says GC to provide Athletic Storage Building. This is different than the one in Alternate #14. – Please clarify. Response: Alternate Bid Athletic Storage Building is by the Site Contractor.

ATTACHMENTS: 4.01 Table of Contents 4.02 Specification Section 035416 – Self-Leveling Underlayment. 4.03 Specification Section 042113 – Brick Masonry. 4.04 Specification Section 074113 – Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels 4.05 Specification Section 077253 – Snow Guards 4.06 Specification Section 085670 – Sound Control Windows. 4.07 Specification Section 087100 – Door Hardware. 4.08 Specification Section 088000 – Glazing 4.09 Specification Section 095426 – Linear Wood Ceilings. 4.10 Specification Section 096519 – Resilient Tile Flooring 4.11 Specification Section 097200 – Digitally Printed Vinyl Wallcovering Murals 4.12 Specification Section 097700 – Interior Wall Panel System Application 4.13 Specification Section 098400 – Acoustic Room Components 4.14 Specification Section 099113 – Exterior Painting 4.15 Specification Section 099123 – Interior Painting 4.16 Specification Section 101400 – Signage 4.17 Specification Section 102600 – Wall and Door Protection. 4.18 Specification Section 105613 – Metal Shelving 4.19 Specification Section 265100 - Interior Lighting 4.20 Specification Section 265600 - Exterior Lighting 4.21 Specification Section 271005 – Structured Cabling For Voice And Data 4.22 Specification Section 275123.1 – Paging Systems.

4.23 AD4-1 Addendum #4 - Vestibule Walk Off Mats 4.24 AD4-2 Addendum #4 - Revised Taping Station @ Trainer Room 4.25 AD4-3 Addendum #4 – Revised Hall Of Fame Lobby Ceiling. 4.26 AD4-4 Addendum #4 – Construction Entrance @ 2nd Floor Plans 4.27 AD4-5 Addendum #4 – Construction Entrance @ 2nd Floor Details 4.28 AD4-6 Addendum #4 – Revised TV Studio Desk Details 4.29 A601 Door Schedule




4.30 A806 Enlarged Plan – Gym 4.31 A900 Finish Schedule

4.32 AD4-C01 PCSM Notes & Details 4.33 E101 4.34 E501 4.35 E602 4.36 E111 4.37 MD105 4.38 MD111 4.39 M106

END OF ADDENDUM NO. 4

SDST High School Addition and Renovations Phase III Erdenheim, PA

SCHRADERGROUP architecture LLC TABLE OF CONTENTS Philadelphia, Pennsylvania TOC - Page 1 SGA Project: 16- 020.3

TABLE OF CONTENTS ADDENDUM NO. 4 Copyright VOLUME 1 DRAWING INDEX

As Listed On Contract Drawings Cover Sheet DIVISION 00- BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS Section 000115 - List of Drawings Section 001113 - Advertisements for Bids

Section 001153 - Qualification Questionnaire Section 001154 - Agreement of Surety Section 001155 - Letter of Insurer

Section 002113 - Instructions to Bidders Appendix A – E Verify Form Appendix B – Sexual Misconduct/Abuse Disclosure Appendix C – Electronic Media Agreement Section 002625 - Substitution Request Form Section 003100 - Prime Contractor Certification Requirement (Sample PDE Plancon G08 Form) Section 003132 - Geotechnical Data 17-06-15 Geotechnical Report as prepared by Earth Engineering, Inc. Boring Locations 17-04-19 Boring Logs Section 004116 - General Construction Bid Form Section 004117 - Mechanical Construction Bid Form Section 004118 - Plumbing Construction Bid Form Section 004120 - Electrical Construction Bid Form Section 004313.13 - Bid Security Section 004313.16 - Bid Bond Form

Section 004519 - Non-Collusion Affidavit Section 005216 - AIA Document A132, 2009 – Draft “Standard Form of Agreement

between Owner and Contractor” Section 006113 00- Performance and Payment Bonds Section 006113.13- Payment Bond Section 006113.16 - Performance Bond Section 006216 - Sample Insurance Certificate Section 007216 - Standard General Conditions of the Contract, AIA Document A232,

2009 “General Conditions of the Contract for Construction” Section 007250 - Construction Documents Abbreviations Section 007343 - Prevailing Wage Rate Requirements Section 007646 - Prevailing Wage Rate Determination Request Section 008200 - Safety and Health Management Plan



DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 011100 - Summary of the Project Section 011200 - Multiple Contract Summary

Section 011400 - Work Restrictions Section 011500 - Field Engineering Section 012129 - Quantity Allowances Section 012200 - Unit Prices Section 012300 - Alternates Section 012600 - Contract Modification Procedures Section 012900 - Payment Procedures Section 012901 - Payment Procedures for Asphalt Paving Section 013100 - Project Management and Coordination Section 013117A - Coordination Drawings Section 013117B - 3D Computer Model Agreement Section 013117C - AIA Document G202-2013 Project BIM Protocol Form Section 013125 - Web-based Project Management System Section 013200 - Construction Progress Documentation Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures Section 013516 - Alteration Project Procedures Section 014000 - Quality Requirements Section 014200 - References Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 015526 - Traffic Control Section 016000 - Product Requirements Section 017300 - Execution Requirements Section 017320 - Selective Demolition Section 017329 - Cutting and Patching Section 017419 - Construction Waste Management Section 017419A - Construction Waste Management & Disposal Appendix A Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures Section 017823 - Operation and Maintenance Data Section 017829 - Project Record Documents Section 017900 - Demonstration & Training Section 018109 - Testing for Indoor Air Quality

VOLUME 2 DIVISION 2 – SITEWORK Section Not Used DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 033001 - Site Concrete Items Section 035300 - Concrete Topping Section 035416 - Self-Leveling Underlayment - NEW



DIVISION 4 – MASONRY Section 042000 - Unit Masonry Section 042113 - Brick Masonry - REVISED Section 047200 - Cast Stone Masonry DIVISION 5 - METALS Section 051200 - Structural Steel Section 051250 - Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Section 052100 - Steel Joists Section 053100 - Steel Deck Section 054000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS, COMPOSITES Section 061053 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry Section 061600 - Sheathing Section 064100 - Interior Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 071113 - Bituminous Dampproofing Section 072100 - Thermal Insulation Section 072715 - Non Bituminous Self-Adhering Sheet Air Barriers Section 074113 - Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels - REVISED Section 074213 - Metal Composite Wall Panels Section 075200 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing Hot Applied (Base Bid) Section 075201 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing Hot Applied (Alternate Bid) Section 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Section 077233 - Roof Hatches Section 077253 - Snow Guards - REVISED Section 078413 - Penetration Firestopping Section 079200 - Joint Sealants Section 079513- Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS Section 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 081416 - Flush Wood Doors Section 081743 - FRP Flush Doors Section 083100 - Access Doors and Frames Section 083313 - Coiling Metal Counter Doors Section 083326 - Overhead Coiling Grilles Section 083513 - Accordion Folding Fire Doors Section 084113 - Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts Section 084413 - Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls Section 085670 - Sound Control Windows - NEW Section 087100 - Door Hardware - REVISED



Section 088000 - Glazing - REVISED DIVISION 9 - FINISHES Section 092216 - Non-Structural Metal Framing Section 092900 - Gypsum Board Section 093013 - Ceramic Tiling Section 095100 - Suspended Acoustical Ceilings Section 095426 - Linear Wood Ceilings - NEW Section 096466 - Wood Athletic Flooring Section 096510 - Vinyl Enhanced Tile Flooring - DELETED Section 096513 - Resilient Base and Accessories Section 096519 - Resilient Tile Flooring - NEW Section 096566 - Resilient Athletic Flooring Section 096616 - Terrazzo Floor Tile Section 096623 - Resinous Matrix Terrazzo Flooring Section 096813 - Tile Carpeting Section 097200 - Digitally Printed Vinyl Wallcovering Murals - NEW Section 097700 - Interior Wall Panel System Application - REVISED Section 098400 - Acoustic Room Components - REVISED Section 099113 - Exterior Painting - REVISED Section 099123 - Interior Painting - REVISED DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Section 101100 - Visual Display Units Section 101400 - Signage – REVISED Section 102113 - Plastic Toilet Compartments Section 102213 - Cubicle Curtains and Tracks Section 102600 - Wall and Door Protection – NEW Section 102800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories Section 104413 - Fire Protection Cabinets Section 104416 - Fire Extinguishers Section 105000 - High Pressure Laminate (PLAM) Athletic Lockers Section 105113 - Metal Lockers Section 105126 - Plastic Lockers Section 105153 - Wire Mesh Partitions Section 105613- Metal Storage Shelving - REVISED Section 107516 - Ground-Set Flagpoles DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT Section 116623 - Gymnasium Equipment Section 116800 - Athletic Equipment and Furnishings DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS Section 122413 - Roller Window Shades Section 123216 - Plastic-Laminate-Faced Casework Section 123623 - Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops



Section 123661 - Solid Surface Fabrication Section 126613 - Telescoping Bleachers DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Section Not Used DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

Section Not Used VOLUME 3

DIVISION 20 Section Not Used DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION Section 210500 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression Section 210553 - Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment Section 211300 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING Section 220100 - General Provisions Section 220101 - Removals Section 220502 - Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Utility Trenches Section 220516 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping Section 220519 - Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping Section 220553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Section 220719 - Plumbing Piping Insulation Section 221005 - Plumbing Piping Section 221006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties Section 224000 - Plumbing Fixtures DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

Section 230501 - General Provisions Section 230513 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment Section 230514 - Variable Frequency Drives Section 230515 - Removals Section 230516 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping Section 230519 - Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping Section 230549 - Vibration Isolation Section 230554 - Mechanical Identification Section 230593 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC Section 230714 - HVAC Duct Insulation Section 230716 - HVAC Equipment Insulation Section 230719 - HVAC Piping Insulation



Section 230900 - Building Management System Section 230993 - HVAC Control Sequence Section 231113 - Facility Fuel Oil Piping Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping Section 232114 - Hydronic Specialties Section 232115 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings Section 232116 - Piping Specialties Section 232117 - Pipe Hangers, Supports and Anchors Section 232123 - Hydronic Pumps Section 232300 - Refrigerant Piping Section 232500 - HVAC Water Treatment Section 233100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings Section 233300- Air Duct Accessories Section 233423 - HVAC Power Ventilators Section 233600 - Air Terminal Units Section 233700 - Air Outlets and Inlets Section 233750 - Wall Louvers Section 236300 - Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condensers Section 237313 - Central Station Air Handling Units Section 237413 - Packaged Air Conditions Units Section 237433 - Packaged Outdoor Heating Make-Up Air Units Section 237513 - Custom Packaged Outdoor HVAC Equipment Section 238101 - Terminal Heat Transfer Units Section 238127 - Small Split-System Heating and Cooling

DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION Section Not Used DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Section 260100 - General Requirements Section 260501 - Minor Electrical Demolition Section 260519 - Low Voltage Power Conductors and Cables Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Section 260534 - Conduit Section 260536 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems Section 260537 - Boxes Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems Section 260923 - Lighting Control Boxes Section 262200 - Low-Voltage Transformers Section 262416 - Panelboards Section 262726 - Wiring Devices Section 262818 - Enclosed Switches Section 265100 - Interior Lighting - REVISED Section 265561 - Auditorium Theatrical Lighting Section 265562 - TV Studio Section 265563 - Performing Arts Theatrical Lighting Section 265568 - Athletic Field Lighting



Section 265600 - Exterior Lighting - REVISED DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS Section 271005 - Structured Cabling for Voice and Data – REVISED Section 275123.1 - Paging Systems - NEW DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Section 281300 - Access Control Section 283100 - Digital Addressable Fire Alarm System DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK Section 311000 - Site Clearing Section 312000 - Earthwork Section 312316 - Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction Section 312316.13 - Trenching Section 312513 - Erosion and Sediment Control

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Section 321216 - Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Section 321723 - Pavement Markings Section 321813 - Artificial Turf Surfacing Section 321823 - Tennis Court Surfacing Section 323113 - Fences, Gates and Athletic Netting Section 323223 - Large Block Retaining Wall Section 328000 - Athletic Field Irrigation Section 329200 - Lawns and Grasses Section 329300 - Landscape Planting Areas DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES Section 331100 - Water Distribution Section 332300 - Testing and Disinfecting Water Mains Section 333000 - Gravity Wastewater Sewer Section 333900 - Sanitary Utility Sewerage Structures Section 334000 - Storm Drainage Section 337119 - Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes DIVISION 34 – TRANSPORTATION Section Not Used END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS



THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


SCHRADERGROUP architecture LLC SELF-LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 035416 - Page 1 SGA Project: 16-020.3

SECTION 035416 – SELF-LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT ADDENDUM NO. 4 PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes self-leveling underlayment for use below interior floor coverings.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 9 Sections for patching and leveling compounds applied with floor

coverings.

C. Allowances: Furnish self-leveling underlayment under the allowances specified in Division 1 Section "Allowances."

D. Unit Prices: Administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices are specified in

Division 1 Section "Unit Prices." 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Plans indicating substrates, locations, and average depths of

underlayment based on survey of substrate conditions.

C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of both underlayment and floor covering system certifying that products are compatible.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Minutes of pre-installation conference.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of

underlayment products required for this Project.



B. Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of both underlayment and floor covering system

certify in writing that products are compatible. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent

deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for

substrate temperature, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance.

1. Place self-leveling underlayment only when ambient temperature and

temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F (10 and 27 deg C). 1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate application of underlayment with requirements of floor covering products,

including adhesives, specified in Division 9 Sections, to ensure compatibility of products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SELF-LEVELING UNDERLAYMENTS

A. Underlayment: Self-leveling product that can be applied in minimum uniform

thicknesses of 1/8” up to 1” and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Basis of design: Ardex; K-15 Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete

a. Uzin, A Division of UFLOOR Systems, Inc. b. Bonsal, W. R. Company. c. ChemRex. d. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.



e. Sika Corporation.

3. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined by ASTM C 219.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (28 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

5. Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated.

B. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm); or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer

for underlayment thickness required.

C. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F (21 deg C).

D. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturers written instructions.

1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturers written

instructions to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.

2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.

B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions, laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.

1. Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869.



Proceed with installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/100 sq. m) in 24 hours.

C. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with

underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer.

2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to- substrate and intercoat adhesion.

3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment.

B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.

1. Apply a final layer without aggregate to produce surface.

2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.

E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in

writing by underlayment manufacturer.

F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction

period.

END OF SECTION 035416


SCHRADERGROUP architecture LLC BRICK MASONRY Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 042113 - 1 SGA Project: 16-020.3

SECTION 042113 - BRICK MASONRY ADDENDUM NO. 4

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Face brick.

2. Thin brick. 3. Mortar and grout.

4. Ties and anchors.

5. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.

2. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.

C. Samples: For each type and color of the following:

1. Face brick.

2. Thin brick. 3. Special brick shapes.

4. Mortar: Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project.

5. Weep holes.

6. Accessories embedded in masonry.



1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units.

a. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances.

b. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67.

2. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

3. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

4. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

B. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.


A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.

C. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

D. Mock-Up Sample Panels: Before installing face brick and thin brick, build sample panels, using materials indicated for the complete Work, to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Build sample panels (Reference architectural series drawings for exterior finish materials layout and arrangement) by full thickness. Include, cavity, ties, weeps, window jamb/sill, and insulation in sample.

1. Locate panels as directed by Architect.

2. Clean exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated.

3. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather resistant membrane.

4. Maintain sample panels during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

5. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors;



tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing.

E. Material Certificates: Prior to delivery, submit to Architect certificates in-dicating compliance with the applicable specifications for Thin Brick Grades, Types or Classes included in these specifications.

F. Thin Brick Test Reports: Submit test reports substantiating compliance with requirements: Sample and test in accordance with ASTM C 67.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

C. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place.

2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place.

B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.

3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings.

4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.



C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning.

D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BRICK

A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units.

1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished.

2. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.

B. Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216. Provide the following: (Face brick to match existing brick)

1. Belden Mayo Blend.

2. Size: No Flatset Modular.

3. Grade: SW.

4. Type: FBS.

C. Thin Brick: Thin brick complying with ASTM C 1088, Grade exterior

1. Type & Size: Match existing color, size, texture, and bond pattern as approved by Architect

2. Thickness: 1”

D. Metal Masonry Support Panel

1. Metal Masonry Support Panel intended for the interior or exterior structural mechanical support of thin veneer on concrete, masonry, metal, or frame construction. 26-gauge architectural grade (structural grade 33) steel with G90 galvanized thermal set coating and stucco embossed texture with angled support ties.



2. Manufacturers: Glen-Gery Corporation or approved equal.

2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.

D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.

2. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.

3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.

4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color.

2.3 REINFORCEMENT

A. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

B. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors:

1. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal anchor section.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 210 with D/A 700-708.

2) Heckmann Building Products, Inc; 315-D with 316.

3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; DW-10.

4) Wire-Bond; 1004, Type III.

b. Anchor Section: Sheet metal plate, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 9 inches (229 mm) long, with screw holes top and bottom and with raised rib-stiffened strap, 5/8 inch (16 mm) wide by 5-1/2 inches (140 mm) long, stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for inserting wire tie.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1355&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456895133&mf=&src=wd






2. Stainless-Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: Proprietary fastener consisting of carbon-steel drill point and 300 Series stainless-steel shank, complying with ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene or EPDM washer, No. 10 (4.83-mm) diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than three exposed threads.


1) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Stainless Steel SX Fastener.

2) ITW Buildex; Illinois Tool Works, Inc; Scots long life Teks.

2.4 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick.

2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches (2400 mm) long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet (3.7 m). Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.


1) Cheney Flashing Company; Cheney 3-Way Flashing (Sawtooth).

2) Keystone Flashing Company, Inc; Keystone 3-Way Interlocking Thruwall Flashing.

3) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc; Mechanically Keyed Flashing.

3. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees.

B. Metal Flashing for thin brick: Minimum Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, .019” (.45mm) thick pre-bent in 10’ lengths.

C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings:

1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.

2. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing urethane sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.










2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC.

B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

C. Weep/Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.


1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent.

2) Blok-Lok Limited; Cell-Vent.

3) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent.

4) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent.

5) Wire-Bond; Cell Vent.

2. Thin brick Weepholes/Vents: Impact resistant polypropylene copolymer, Density 2,000 grams/sq. meter Size: 3/8”x1/2”x4’

D. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Advanced Building Products Inc; Mortar Break.

b. CavClear/Archovations, Inc; Stone Mat.

c. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop.

d. Mortar Net USA, Ltd; Mortar Net.

2. Provide one of the following configurations:

a. Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches (250 mm) high, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches (175 mm) deep that prevent clogging with mortar droppings.














2.6 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.

b. EaCo Chem, Inc.

c. PROSOCO, Inc.

2.7 MORTAR MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar.

2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.

1. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

2. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.

C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi.

3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

2.8 ADHESIVES

A. Adhesive for thin clay brick







1. High-strength mastics must exceed ASTM D3498 and ASTM C557 specifications with less than 70 grams of VOC per liter with a shear value between the thin veneer and the panel greater than 100 PSI

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

C. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.

D. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.

E. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.

F. Thin brick: Comply with tolerances in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Running Bond.

C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that



are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

E. Thin Brick:

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions as applicable to each type of substrate required.

2. Trim, starter angle, and flashing shall be installed prior to panel installation.

3. Panels shall be clean, free of dirt, oil or any other foreign contaminant. 4. Lay out panels in advance for accurate spacing of tabs to allow installation

of full height masonry units at top and bottom of walls, openings, etc. when possible. Note: Panel sizes will vary depending on spaces.

5. Attach panels flat to the substrate in true and level rows with support ties aligned and level to each other at flat sections as well as corners.

6. Install full-size uncut panels when possible. When cutting is required to provide staggered panel joints or to fit specific application, cut panels to provide clean, unbent edges.

7. Install panels to ensure a 1/16” to 1/8” gap between the sides of the panels and butt panels vertically, always leaving a gap at movement joints locations equal to the thickness of the joint.

8. Stop panel ¼” to 3/8” from inside corners, openings and other materials to allow for movement.

9. Fastener Installation: Mechanically attach metal panels with a minimum of one fastener per sq. ft. (900 cm2) increasing spacing along the top and bottom of the wall and around the openings.

10. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement joints, returns and offsets. a. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners and

jambs. b. Ensure unfinished or cut faces are not exposed to view upon

completion. 11. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform

blend of color and texture. 12. Lay masontry in bond pattern as to match existing. 13. Back face of thin brick must be dry and clean; free of dirt, oil or any other

foreign contaminant. 14. Adhere individual units to panel using specified adhesive placed on the

back of the units in two ½” to ¾” dabs or vertical strips 3/8” wide. For



corner brick apply one dab on the head and one dap at each end of the long leg. a. Do not apply adhesive in a manner that would create horizontal strips

of adhesive that may prevent moisture from draining down the wall. b. Do not use excessive adhesive as this will cause thin brick to tilt

away from the wall prior to adhesive set. 15. Thin veneers shall be applied within 5 to 10 minutes after adhesive has

been applied and before film begins to form on the adhesive. 16. Space thin brick to ensure that the head joints do not exceed 5/8” (16 mm)

or fall below ¼” (6.4 mm). 17. When adjustment is necessary to be made after adhesive begins to harden,

remove hardened adhesive and replace with fresh adhesive. 18. Keeps areas intended to receive sealant clean of thin brick, adhesive and

other materials during construction. 19. Do not allow units to bridge movement joins in substrate.

3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow brick as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.

2. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

D. Thin Brick: After adhesive has set a minimum of 12 hours, completely fill head and bed joints between adhered veneers intended to receive mortar.

3.5 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:

1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener.

2. Provide not less than 2 inches (50 mm) of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.



3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down.

4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches (458 mm) o.c. vertically and 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. (0.2 sq. m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches (203 mm), around perimeter.

3.6 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form expansion joints in brick as follows:

1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches (100 mm) in direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if any.

2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry.

3. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated.

4. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

C. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm).

1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.

3.7 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where indicated.

B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

3.8 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:



1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches (200 mm); with upper edge tucked under building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches (100 mm).

3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams.

4. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.

C. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows:

1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes.

2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under brick sills. Turn wicking down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible.

3. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

D. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

E. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/vent products to form vents.

F. Thin Brick: 1. Install embedded flashing and weep holes in Glen-Gery Thin Tech® wall

panel assemblies at the base of the wall, above openings, above horizontal movement joints and other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.

2. Before covering with wall panel or mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

3. Carry flashing vertically as detailed, but not less than 3” (76 mm) above horizontal plane.

4. Lap flashing a minimum of 3” (76 mm). 5. Seal all flashing laps with compatible lap cement. 6. Extend head and sill flashings not less than 6” (150 mm) beyond edges of

openings; seal with mastic.



7. Project starter angle from face of wall approximately ¼” (6 mm) to form a drip.

3.9 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.10 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owner's property.



SCHRADERGROUP architecture LLC STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS Baltimore, MD 074113 - Page 1 SGA Project: 16-020.3

SECTION 074113 - STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS ADDENDUM NO. 4

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Standing-seam metal roof panels.

2. Metal soffit panels.

3. Metal flashing and trim.

4. Metal downspouts and gutters.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.

C. Samples: For each type of metal panel indicated.


A. Product Test Reports.

B. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.



1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646.

C. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-resistance class indicated.

1. Uplift Rating: UL 90.

D. FM Global Listing: Provide metal roof panels and component materials that comply with requirements in FM Global 4471 as part of a panel roofing system and that are listed in FM Global's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Global markings.

1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90.



2. Hail Resistance: SH.

E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation.

1. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1514.

B. Curved Vertical-Rib, Seamed-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels, engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and mechanically seaming panels together.

1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide CENTRIA; SRS 3 Structural AEP Span, Curved Span-Lok Standing Seam Roof System, or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Architectural Metal Systems; a Nucor company. b. ATAS International, Inc. c. Dimensional Metals, Inc. d. Garland Company. e. MBCI; a division of NCI Building Systems, L.P. f. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation. g. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.

2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated (Galvalume®) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: 22 gauge. b. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. c. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. d. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

3. Clips: One-piece, stainless steel, fixed to accommodate thermal movement.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456836612&mf=04&src=wd






4. Panel Coverage: As indicated. 5. Panel Height: 1-1/2 inches and 3 inches. 6. Panel Width: 16 inches.

2.3 METAL SOFFIT PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal soffit panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners and factory-applied sealant in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

B. Flush-Profile Metal Soffit Panels: Solid panels formed with vertical panel edges and flat pan between panel edges; with flush joint between panels.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: AEP Span, Prestige series metal soffit panels or a comparable product of one of the following:

a. Architectural Metal Systems; a Nucor company. b. ATAS International, Inc. c. Dimensional Metals, Inc. d. MBCI; a division of NCI Building Systems, L.P. e. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation. f. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.

2. Material: Same material, finish, and color as metal roof panels.

2.4 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Underlayment: Provide self-adhering, cold-applied, sheet underlayment, a minimum of 30 mils thick, consisting of slip-resistant, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F; ASTM D 1970. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F;

ASTM D 1970. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Carlisle Residential, a division of Carlisle Construction Materials; WIP 300HT.

b. Grace Construction Products; Grace Ice and Water Shield HT. c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT. d. Kirsch Building Products, LLC; Sharkskin Ultra SA. e. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield. f. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment.





http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=6911&mf=04&src=wd









B. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226/D 22M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts.

C. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645; cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system.

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal panels.

2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer.

3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, head wall, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.

D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads.

E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing, 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.

F. Gutters: Formed from same material as metal panel. Match profile as shown on drawings. Fabricate in minimum 12-foot long sections, sized according to SMACNA’s “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual”. Furnish gutter supposed spaced 36 inches o.c., fabricated from same metal as gutters. Finish gutters to match metal roof panels.



G. Downspouts: Formed from the same material as metal panel in minimum 10-foot long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets. Provide 4” x 6” downspouts at locations as shown on drawings. Finish downspouts to match metal roof.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.

C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Aluminum Panels and Accessories:

1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

2. Concealed Finish: White or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply at locations indicated below, wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.



1. Apply over the roof area indicated below:

a. Roof perimeter for a distance up from eaves of 36 inches beyond interior wall line.

b. Valleys, from lowest point to highest point, for a distance on each side of 18 inches. Overlap ends of sheets not less than 6 inches.

c. Rake edges for a distance of 18 inches. d. Hips and ridges for a distance on each side of 12 inches. e. Roof-to-wall intersections for a distance from wall of 18 inches. f. Around dormers, chimneys, skylights, and other penetrating elements for a

distance from element of 18 inches.

B. Felt Underlayment: Apply at locations indicated below, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.

1. Apply on roof not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap over edges of self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches, in shingle fashion to shed water.

C. Slip Sheet: Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels.

D. Flashings: Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

3.3 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panel Installation: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended in writing by manufacturer.

1. Install clips with self-tapping fasteners. 2. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and

completely engaging factory-applied sealant. 3. Watertight Installation:

a. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal joints of metal panels, using sealant or tape as recommend in writing by manufacturer as needed to make panels watertight.

b. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.

c. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.

B. Metal Soffit Panels: Provide metal soffit panels full width of soffits. Install panels perpendicular to support framing.

1. Flash and seal panels with weather closures where metal soffit panels meet walls at perimeter of all openings.



C. Fascia Panels: Align bottom of panel’s and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws. Flash and seal panel’s with weather closures where fasciae meet soffits, along lower panel edges and at perimeter of all openings.

D. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

E. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

F. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters to eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 3 feet o.c. using manufacturer’s standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion.

G. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2 inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from the walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between.

1. Tie downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.



SCHRADERGROUP architecture LLC SNOW GUARDS Philadelphia, PA 077253 - Page 1 SGA Project 16-020.3

SECTION 077253 - SNOW GUARDS ADDENDUM NO. 4

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Rail-type Snow Guards for Gymnasium and Field House using clamp brackets to standing seams of metal roofing system.

2. Seam mounted, stop type Snow Guards for Ticket Booth and Press Box.


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for snow guards.

B. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans showing layouts and attachment details of snow guards.

1. Include details of rail-type snow guards. 2. Include calculation of number and location of snow guards based on snow load,

roof slope, roof type, components, spacings, and finish.

C. Samples: Base, bracket, and 12-inch- long rail.


A. Product Test Reports: For each type of snow guard, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Performance Requirements: Provide snow guards that withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, or fastener



disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

B. Structural Performance:

1. Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

2.2 2-PIPE RAIL STYLE SNOW GUARDS

A. 2 PIPE Rail-Type Snow Guards: (for Standing Seam Metal roof systems)

1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. Alpine SnowGuards, Inc. or approved equal.

2. Description: ASG4025 Standing Seam, 2-PIPE Snow Guard.

B. Components:

1. ASG4025, 2-Pipe Snow Guard System. 2. Tubing (Snow Fence). 3. Couplings. 4. End Caps. 5. End Collars. 6. Ice Flags. 7. Fasteners:

a. To be of metal compatible with snow guards. b. Fasteners should be selected for compatibility with the roof deck. c. Fastener strength should exceed or be equal to that of the snow guard

system.

C. Materials

1. Snow Guard Bracket: Aluminum.

2. Tubing:

a. Aluminum: 6000 Series, 1 inch outside diameter and 0.120 inch wall thickness, extruded.

3. Couplings:

a. Aluminum: 6000 Series.

1) Internal and concealed coupling 3 inches long. 2) External and exposed coupling which can also serve as an

expansion mechanism 5 inches long.

4. End Caps: 304 Stainless Steel.




5. End Collars:

a. 6000 Series Aluminum. 6. Ice Flags:

a. 6000 Series Aluminum – 3” wide.

2.3 STOP TYPE SNOW GUARDS:

A. Seam-Mounted, Stop-Type Snow Guards: Cast-aluminum stops designed for attachment to vertical ribs of standing-seam metal roof panels with stainless-steel set screws. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by the following: a. Alpine SnowGuards, Inc. or approved equal.

2. Description: PD81 Standing Seam, Pad-style Snow Guard.

B. Materials: 1. Snow Guard Block: 6000 series aluminum. 2. Stainless Steel Set Screw: 304 series stainless steel.

2.4 FINISH:

A. Powder Coated: Extreme exterior weather and UV resistant Series 38 paint system as provided by RAL TIGER DRYLAC or approved equivalent.

B. Color: Match metal roofing system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, snow guard attachment, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prime substrates according to snow guard manufacturer's written instructions.



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install snow guards according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Attachment for Standing-Seam metal roof: Clamp to seam technology



SCHRADERGROUP architecture LLC SOUND CONTROL WINDOWS Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 085670 - Page 1 SGA Project: 16-020.3

SECTION 085670 – SOUND CONTROL WINDOWS ADDENDUM NO. 4

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.3 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes sound control windows with STC ratings of 45.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions.

B. Test Reports: Upon request submit certified test reports from recognized test laboratories.

C. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. Delivery: Deliver material in the manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

B. Provide labels indicating brand name, source of procurement, style, size and thickness.

C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Warranty Period: Two years.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Sound Control Windows:

1. Noise S.T.O.P. Interior/Exterior Acoustical – Soundproof Windows by Acoustical Surfaces Inc. (Basis of Design) or approved equal.

2.2 SOUND CONTROL WINDOWS

A. Product: Model Studio 4 or approved equal.

1. STC rating: 45.

2. 4 degree angled glass for max acoustical performance.

3. Size (clear opening): As indicated on Drawing.

4. Tint: Optional.

5. Glazing: 1" insulated glass unit consists of 2 pieces of 1/4" laminated glass.

6. Frame: 4-1/2" anodized aluminum frame.

B. Window Frame:

1. Anodized aluminum.

a. Finish: Clear.

2. Angled glass for maximum acoustical performance.

3. Acoustically treated frames and seals.

4. Class A-1 ASTM E-84 Nonflammable Sound Silencer™ acoustical frame insert.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine openings, substrates, anchorage, and conditions.

B. Immediately inspect shipment for damage during transit i.e., damage caused by fork lifts, stacking, water stains etc. and disclose to delivery driver prior to signing for receipt.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Manufacturer’s Instructions:



1. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the window manufacturer.

2. Installation manual is available from manufacturer’s website.

B. Shipping:

1. Glass shipped separately to avoid breakage.

2. Easy snap in glass installation on job site.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.






SCHRADERGROUP architecture LLC DOOR HARDWARE Philadelphia, PA 087100 - Page 1 SGA Project 16-020.3

SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE ADDENDUM NO.4

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:

1. Swinging doors. 2. Other doors to the extent indicated.

B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware Schedule”. 2. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 3. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”.

D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 7. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.

E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:

1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series 2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies



1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes.

B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule."

2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission.

3. Content: Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item.

b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on

floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in

schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product.

4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.

C. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores.

D. Informational Submittals:



1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency.

E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals.


A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated.

1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted.

E. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards.

F. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document:

1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.



G. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware.

1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required.

2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening.

4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration

procedures

H. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.



B. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.

C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Special Warranty Periods: 1. Five years for exit hardware. 2. Twenty five years for manual surface door closer bodies.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.



B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

C. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.

D. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants.

2.2 HANGING DEVICES

A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified in the Door Hardware Sets.

1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1

hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.

2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required:

a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.

3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight.

b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.

4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on Drawings:



a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Bommer Industries (BO). b. Hager Companies (HA). c. McKinney Products (MK).

B. Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 certified continuous geared hinge. with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to template screw locations. Factory trim hinges to suit door height and prepare for electrical cut-outs.


a. Bommer Industries (BO). b. McKinney Products (MK). c. Pemko Manufacturing (PE).

C. Pin and Barrel Continuous Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 certified pin and barrel continuous hinges with minimum 14 gauge Type 304 stainless steel hinge leaves, concealed teflon coated stainless pin, and twin self lubricated nylon bearings at each knuckle separation. Factory trim hinges to suit door height and prepare for electrical cut-outs.


a. Markar Products (MR). b. McKinney Products (MK). c. Pemko Manufacturing (PE).

2.3 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES

A. Electrified Quick Connect Transfer Hinges: Provide electrified transfer hinges with Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable.


a. McKinney Products (MK) - QC (# wires) Option.

B. Concealed Quick Connect Electric Power Transfers: Provide concealed wiring pathway housing mortised into the door and frame for low voltage electrified door hardware.



Furnish with Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable.


a. Securitron (SU) - EL-CEPT Series.

2.4 DOOR OPERATING TRIM

A. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified.

1. Flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt retraction device location approximately six feet from the floor.

2. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. 3. Surface bolts to be minimum 8” in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and

U.L. listed for windstorm components where applicable. 4. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as

required for appropriate installation and operation.


a. Burns Manufacturing (BU). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC).

B. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and design specified in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates.

1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated.

2. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated.

3. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets.





2.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.


a. Stanley Best (BE). b. No Substitution.

C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:

1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application.

2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring.

3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder

face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: Match Facility Standard.

D. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following:

1. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other manufacturers' cylinders.

E. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed.

1. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements.

2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner.

3. New System: Key locks to a new key system as directed by the Owner.

F. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:

1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). 3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10).

G. Construction Keying: Provide temporary keyed construction cores.

H. Key Registration List (Bitting List):



1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software.

2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner.

2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES

A. Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1 certified.

1. Furnish with solid cast levers, standard 2 3/4” backset, and 1/2" (3/4" at rated paired openings) throw brass or stainless steel latchbolt.

2. Locks are to be non-handed and fully field reversible.


a. Stanley Best (BE) – 9K Series. b. No Substitution.

2.7 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES

A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:

1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated

for aluminum framing. 4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable

stop for rescue hardware applications.

B. Standards: Comply with the following:

1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36. 4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.

2.8 ELECTRIC STRIKES

A. Standard Electric Strikes: Heavy duty, cylindrical and mortise lock electric strikes conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.31, Grade 1, UL listed for both Burglary Resistance and for use on fire rated door assemblies. Stainless steel construction with dual interlocking plunger design tested to exceed 3000 lbs. of static strength and 350 ft-lbs.



of dynamic strength. Strikes tested for a minimum 1 million operating cycles. Provide strikes with 12 or 24 VDC capability and supplied standard as fail-secure unless otherwise specified. Option available for latchbolt and latchbolt strike monitoring indicating both the position of the latchbolt and locked condition of the strike.


a. HES (HS).

2.9 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES

A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets.

2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements.

3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets.

4. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration.

5. Electromechanical Options: Subject to same compliance standards and requirements as mechanical exit devices, electrified devices to be of type and design as specified in hardware sets. Include any specific controllers when conventional power supplies are not sufficient to provide the proper inrush current.

6. Motorized Electric Latch Retraction: Devices with an electric latch retraction feature must use motors which have a maximum current draw of 600mA. Solenoid driven latch retraction is not acceptable.

7. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts.

a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets.



b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets.

8. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor.

9. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles.

10. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.

11. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application.

12. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.

B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature.


a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series. b. No Substitution.

2.10 DOOR CLOSERS

A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover.

2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors.

3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test witnessed and verified by UL.

4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.



5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets.

6. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible

install closers on door for optimum aesthetics.

7. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets.

B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide non-handed units standard.


a. LCN (LC) – 4040XP Series b. No Substitution.

2.11 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM

A. Door Protective Trim

1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.

2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.

3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16” above the bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements for size and applications.

4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following:

a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick.

5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes.





2.12 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.

B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders.



C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function.


a. Rixson Door Controls (RF). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA).

2.13 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS

A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.

B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.



1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.

C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.

1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated.

E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. National Guard Products (NG). 2. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).

2.14 ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES

A. Request-to-Exit Motion Sensor: Request-to-Exit Sensors motion detectors specifically designed for detecting exiting through a door from the secure area to a non-secure area. Include built-in timers (up to 60 second adjustable timing), door monitor with sounder alert, internal vertical pointability coverage, 12VDC or 24VDC power and selectable relay trigger with fail safe/fail secure modes.


a. Securitron (SU) - XMS Series.

B. Door Position Switches: Door position magnetic reed contact switches specifically designed for use in commercial door applications. On recessed models the contact and magnetic housing snap-lock into a 1" diameter hole. Surface mounted models include wide gap distance design complete with armored flex cabling. Provide SPDT, N/O switches with optional Rare Earth Magnet installation on steel doors with flush top channels.


a. Securitron (SU) - DPS Series.

C. Power Supplies: Provide Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listed 12VDC or 24VDC (field selectable) filtered and regulated power supplies. Include battery backup option with integral battery charging capability in addition to operating the DC load in



event of line voltage failure. Provide the least number of units, at the appropriate amperage level, sufficient to exceed the required total draw for the specified electrified hardware and access control equipment.


a. Securitron (SU) - BPS Series.

2.15 FABRICATION

A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.

2.16 FINISHES

A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.

B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware

C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.

1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals.

B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."

3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."

4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located.

C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be



adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.


A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware.

3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS

1. MK - McKinney 2. MR - Markar 3. PE - Pemko 4. RO - Rockwood 5. SA - Sargent 6. BE - Stanley Security Solutions Inc (BE) 7. HS - HES 8. RF - Rixson 9. LC - LCN Closers 10. SU – Securitron 11. WW- WiringWizard.NET

Hardware Sets

Set: 1.0

Doors: V100-1, V101

2 Continuous Hinge w/PT CFM SLF-HD1 PT x Length Required PE

https://www.openingsstudio.com/AAOS/AAOS/CutSheetViewer.jsp?IDS=135578307,




1 Removable Mullion L980A x Length Required US28 SA 1 Rim Exit Device CPC LC 16 55 56 8804 US32D SA 1 Rim Exit Device CPC LC 16 55 56 8810 US32D SA

4 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE

4 Cylinder 1E-74 / 1E-72 626 BE 1 SMART Pac Bridge Rectifier 2005M3 HS 1 Electric Strike 9400 630 HS 2 Pull RM202 Mtg-Type 12XHD US32D RO 2 Door Closer 4040XP SCUSH AL LC 1 Threshold 2005AV MS25SS x Length Required PE 1 Gasketing Provided By Frame Supplier 2 Sweep 3452CNB x Length Required PE 1 Card Reader Provided by Security Supplier 2 Electric Power Transfer EL-CEPT SU

2 Door Wire Harness QC-C*** x Length / Type as Required) MK

2 Frame Wire Harness QC-C1500P MK 2 Position Switch DPS2-M / W-BK SU 1 Motion Sensor XMS SU 1 Power Supply BPS (Size & Type as Required) SU

1 Wiring Diagram Elevations and Point to Point as Specified WW

Notes: Electronic Operation: Free egress at all times. Presenting valid credential to card reader retracts latch bolts allowing entry. Entry also possible via key override. Request to exit switches, incorporated in exit device push pads, signal an authorized egress. Door position switches monitor doors status. Fail Secure.

Set: 2.0

Doors: V100-2 2 Continuous Hinge w/PT CFM SLF-HD1 PT x Length Required PE 1 Removable Mullion L980A x Length Required US28 SA 2 Rim Exit Device CPC LC 16 55 56 8810 US32D SA

2 Rim Exit Device (exit only w/elec. latch retraction) 16 55 56 8810 US32D SA

1 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE 1 Cylinder 1E-74 / 1E-72 626 BE


https://www.openingsstudio.com/AAOS/AAOS/CutSheetViewer.jsp?IDS=17257592,20753917,



















2 Pull RM202 Mtg-Type 12XHD US32D RO 1 Conc Overhead Stop 1ADJ-X36 630 RF 1 Door Closer 4040XP SCUSH AL LC 1 Automatic Opener 6330 689 NO 2 Door Closer 4040XP SCUSH AL LC 1 Threshold 2005AV MS25SS x Length Required PE 1 Gasketing Provided By Frame Supplier OT 2 Sweep 3452CNB x Length Required PE 2 Electric Power Transfer EL-CEPT SU 2 Door Wire Harness QC-C*** x Length / Type as Required) MK 2 Frame Wire Harness QC-C1500P MK 2 Position Switch DPS2-M/W-BK SU 1 Wall Mounted Actuator 505 NO 1 Power Supply BPS (Size & Type as Required) SU

1 Wiring Diagram Elevations and Point to Point as Specified. 00

Notes: Electronic Operation: Free egress at all times. Exit device latches retracted remotely via signal. Request to exit switches, incorporated in exit device push pads, signal an authorized egress. Door position switches monitor doors status. Fail Secure.

Set: 3.0 Doors: 133-1, 133-2 126-1, 126-2 2 Continuous Hinge CFM SLF-HD1 x Length Required PE 1 Removable Mullion L980A x Length Required US28 SA 1 Rim Exit Device (nightlatch) CPC LC 16 8804 US32D SA 1 Rim Exit Device (exit only) CPC LC 16 8810 US32D SA 4 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE 4 Cylinder 1E-74 / 1E-72 626 BE 2 Pull RM202 Mtg-Type 12XHD US32D RO 2 Door Closer 4040XP SCUSH AL LC 1 Threshold 2005AV MS25SS x Length Required PE 1 Rain Guard 346C x Door Width + 4” PE 1 Gasketing Provided By Frame Supplier OT 2 Sweep 3452CNB x Length Required PE 2 Position Switch DPS-M / W-BK SU





















Set: 3.1 Doors: G005, G006 2 Continuous Hinge CFM HD1 x Length Required PE 1 Removable Mullion L980A x Length Required US28 SA 1 Rim Exit Device CPC LC 16 8804 US32D SA 1 Rim Exit Device CPC LC 16 8810 US32D SA


4 Cylinder 1E-74 / 1E-72 626 BE 2 Pull RM202 Mtg-Type 12XHD US32D RO 2 Door Closer 4040XP SCUSH AL LC

1 Threshold 2005AV MS25SS x Length Required PE

1 Gasketing 303AS x Length Required PE 1 Rain Guard 346C x Door Width +4" PE 2 Sweep 3452CNB x Length Required PE 1 Astragal 29324CNB x Door Height PE 2 Position Switch DPS2-M / W-BK SU Notes: Verify and coordinate scheduled hardware with existing conditions prior to ordering. Prepare existing frame and provide all filler plates/accessories required for proper installation and function of new hardware.

Set: 4.0

HARDWARE SET NOT USED Doors: FH02 1 Continuous Hinge CFM HD1 x Length Required PE 1 Rim Exit Device (classrooom) LC 16 8843 ETP US32D SA


2 Cylinder 1E-74 / 1E-72 626 BE 1 Door Closer 4040XP SCUSH AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Threshold 2005AV MS25SS x Length Required PE 1 Gasketing 305CR (Head & Jambs) PE

















https://www.openingsstudio.com/AAOS/AAOS/CutSheetViewer.jsp?IDS=134315614,153428460,134325276,










1 Rain Guard 346C x Door Width +4" PE 1 Sweep 3452CNB x Length Required PE 1 Position Switch DPS-M / W-BK SU

Set: 5.0

HARDWARE SET NOT USED

Doors: C203, C204, PB03 1 Continuous Hinge CFM HD1 x Length Required PE 1 Cylindrical Lock (storeroom) 9K37D 14D 626 BE


1 Door Closer 4040XP SHCUSH AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Threshold 2005AV MS25SS x Length Required PE 1 Gasketing 305CR (Head & Jambs) PE 1 Rain Guard 346C x Door Width +4" PE 1 Sweep 3452CNB x Length Required PE

Set: 6.0

HARDWARE SET NOT USED Doors: 206 1 Continuous Hinge CFM HD1 x Length Required PE 1 Cylindrical Lock (storeroom) 9K37D 14D 626 BE


1 Door Closer 4040XP REG AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Threshold 169A MSES25SS x Length Required PE 1 Gasketing 305CR (Head & Jambs) PE 1 Sweep 315CN x Length Required PE 1 Rain Guard 346C x Door Width +4" PE 1 Sweep 345AV x Length Required PE


























Set: 7.0


Doors: FH01 1 Continuous Hinge CFM HD1 x Length Required PE 1 Deadbolt 8T37S 626 BE


1 Push Plate 70C-RKW US32D-316 RO 1 Pull Plate 107x70C US32D-316 RO 1 Door Closer 4040XP REG AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Threshold 171A MS25SS x Length Required PE 1 Gasketing 305CR (Head & Jambs) PE 1 Sweep 315CN x Length Required PE 1 Rain Guard 346C x Door Width +4" PE

Set: 8.0 Doors: C101-1, C102-4, C101-2 2 Continuous Hinge CFM SLF-HD1 x Length Required PE 2 Exit Device (dummy bar) 8893 US32D SA 2 Pull RM202 Mtg-Type 12XHD US32D RO 2 Door Closer 4040XP SCUSH AL LC 1 Gasketing Provided By Frame Supplier OT

Set: 8.1 Doors: C101-2 2 Continuous Hinge CFM SLF-HD1 x Length Required PE 2 Exit Device (dummy bar) 8893 US32D SA 2 Pull RM202 Mtg-Type 12XHD US32D RO 1 Conc Overhead Stop 1ADJ-X36 630 RF























1 Door Closer 4040XP SCUSH AL LC 1 Automatic Opener 6330 689 NO 1 Gasketing Provided By Frame Supplier OT 1 Vestibule Actuator 504 NO 1 Frame Mounted Actuator 503 NO

Set: 9.0 Doors: 135 128 6 Heavyweight Hinge TA786 US26D MK 1 Removable Mullion L980S x Length Required PC SA 1 Rim Exit Device LC 16 8804 ETP US32D SA 1 Rim Exit Device LD 8810 US32D SA 3 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE 3 Cylinder 1E-74 / 1E-72 626 BE 1 SMART Pac Bridge Rectifier 2005M3 HS 1 Electric Strike 9500 630 HS 2 Door Closer 4040XP SCUSH AL LC 2 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 2 Silencer 608 RO 1 Card Reader Provided by Security Supplier OT 1 Motion Sensor XMS SU 1 Power Supply BPS (Size & Type as Required) SU Notes: Electronic Operation: Free egress at all times. Presenting valid credential to card reader releases electric strike allowing entry. Entry also possible via key override. Motion sensing request to exit switch signals an authorized egress. Door position switch monitors door status. Fail Secure.

Set: 10.0 Doors: C101-3 8 Heavyweight Hinge TA786 US26D MK 2 Surface Vert Rod Exit LC 16 NB8743 ETP US32D SA 2 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE 2 Cylinder 1E-74 / 1E-72 626 BE 2 Door Closer 4040XP HEDA AL LC 2 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO















https://www.openingsstudio.com/AAOS/AAOS/CutSheetViewer.jsp?IDS=137184411,134342834,153428476,134325276,








2 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 2 Silencer 608 RO

2 Electromagnetic Holder 990 (Voltage & Accessories As Required) 689 RF

1 Gasketing S88D PE 1 Astragal S771C x Door Height PE Notes: Doors are magnetically held open. Integrate with fire alarm system to release upon fire alarm activation.

Set: 11.0 Doors: 133-3, G001, G004 126-3 6 Heavyweight Hinge TA786 US26D MK 2 Surface Vert Rod Exit LC 16 NB8743 ETP US32D SA 4 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE 4 Cylinder 1E-74 / 1E-72 626 BE 2 Door Closer 4040XP SCUSH AL LC 2 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 2 Silencer 608 RO Notes: Openings G001 & G004: Verify and coordinate scheduled hardware with existing conditions prior to ordering. Prepare existing frame and provide all filler plates/accessories required for proper installation and function of new hardware.

Set: 12.0 Doors: C102-2, C102-3, C102-1 6 Heavyweight Hinge TA786 US26D MK 2 Surface Vert Rod Exit LC 12 NB8743 ETP US32D SA 2 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE 2 Cylinder 1E-74 / 1E-72 626 BE 2 Door Closer 4040XP EDA AL LC 2 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 2 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO

2 Electromagnetic Holder 990 (Voltage & Accessories As Required) 689 RF




















1 Gasketing S88D PE 1 Astragal S771C x Door Height PE Notes: Doors are magnetically held open. Integrate with fire alarm system to release upon fire alarm activation.

Set: 13.0 Doors: C200-1, G002, G003 3 Heavyweight Hinge TA786 US26D MK 1 Rim Exit Device (classrooom) LC 16 8843 ETP US32D SA 2 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE 2 Cylinder 1E-74 / 1E-72 626 BE 1 Door Closer 4040XP EDA AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO Notes: Openings G002 & G003: Verify and coordinate scheduled hardware with existing conditions prior to ordering. Prepare existing frame and provide all filler plates/accessories required for proper installation and function of new hardware.

Set: 14.0 Doors: 132A-1 129A-1 3 Hinge TA714 US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (office) 9K37AB 14D 626 BE 1 Cylindrical Lock (storeroom) 9K37D 14D 626 BE 1 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE 1 Electric Strike 1500C 630 HS 1 SMART Pac Bridge Rectifier 2005M3 HS 1 Surface Overhead Stop 10-X36 630 RF 1 Door Closer 4040XP REG AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D PE 1 Card Reader Provided by Security Supplier OT 1 Position Switch DPS-M / W-BK SU























1 Motion Sensor XMS SU 1 Power Supply BPS (Size & Type as Required) SU 3 Silencer 608 RO Notes: Electronic Operation: Free egress at all times. Presenting valid credential to card reader releases electric strike allowing entry. Entry also possible via key override. Motion sensing request to exit switch signals an authorized egress. Door position switch monitors door status. Fail Secure.

Set: 15.0 Doors: 133B, 126B 8 Hinge TA714 US26D MK 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 2 Manual Flush Bolt 555 / 557 (As Required) US26D RO 1 Cylindrical Lock (storeroom) 9K37D 14D 626 BE 1 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE 2 Surface Overhead Stop 10-X36 630 RF 2 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 2 Silencer 608 RO

Set: 16.0 Doors: 115, 127, C100-2, M001 6 Hinge TA714 US26D MK 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 2 Manual Flush Bolt 555 / 557 (As Required) US26D RO 1 Cylindrical Lock (storeroom) 9K37D 14D 626 BE 1 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE 2 Surface Overhead Stop 10-X36 630 RF 2 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 2 Silencer 608 RO

Set: 16.1 Doors: C102-1 6 Heavyweight Hinge TA786 US26D MK





















1 Surface Vert Rod Exit LC 12 NB8706 ETP US32D SA 1 Surface Vert Rod Exit 12 NB8710 US32D SA


2 Door Closer 4040XP EDA AL LC 2 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D PE 1 Astragal S771C x Door Height PE

Set: 17.0

HARDWARE SET NOT USED Doors: 104, 113, 127 6 Hinge TA714 US26D MK 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 2 Manual Flush Bolt 555 / 557 (As Required) US26D RO 1 Cylindrical Lock (storeroom) 9K37D 14D 626 BE


2 Surface Overhead Stop 10-X36 630 RF 2 Silencer 608 RO

Set: 18.0

Doors: 112B, 112C, 114B, 133A, 101B, 103B, 126A, FH03 3 Hinge TA714 US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (storeroom) 9K37D 14D 626 BE 1 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO

Set: 19.0 Doors: 114A, 119, 122, 134, 103A 3 Hinge TA714 US26D MK




























1 Cylindrical Lock (storeroom) 9K37D 14D 626 BE 1 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE 1 Surface Overhead Stop 10-X36 630 RF 3 Silencer 608 RO

Set: 20.0

Doors: 120, 121, 125-1, C200-2, 109, 110, 116-1, 205B 3 Hinge TA714 US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (classroom) 9K37R 14D 626 BE 1 Cylindrical Lock (storeroom) 9K37D 14D 626 BE 1 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE 1 Door Closer 4040XP REG AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO

Set: 20.1 Doors: 128-1 3 Hinge TA714 US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (classroom) 9K37R 14D 626 BE


1 Door Closer 4040XP REG AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D PE

Set: 21.0


Doors: 108 3 Hinge TA714 US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (storeroom) 9K37D 14D 626 BE


























1 Door Closer 4040XP CUSH AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO

Set: 22.0


Doors: 112-1 3 Hinge TA714 US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (storeroom) 9K37D 14D 626 BE


1 Door Closer 4040XP REG AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D PE

Set: 23.0

Doors: 112A, 131A, 101A, 125A, PB01, PB02 3 Hinge TA714 US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (office) 9K37AB 14D 626 BE 1 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D PE 1 Door Bottom PDB411AE x Length Required PE

Set: 24.0 Doors: 235, 235A, 205, 205A 3 Hinge TA714 US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (office) 9K37AB 14D 626 BE 1 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE


























1 Surface Overhead Stop 10-X36 630 RF 1 Gasketing S88D PE 1 Door Bottom PDB411AE x Length Required PE

Set: 25.0

Doors: 132, 132A-2, 233A-1, 233B, TV100, 129, 129A-2, 200A-1, 200A-2, 200B 3 Hinge TA714 US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (classroom) 9K37R 14D 626 BE 1 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO

Set: 25.1 Doors: 233A-2, 234 3 Hinge TA714 US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (classroom) 9K37R 14D 626 BE


1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D PE 1 Door Bottom PDB411AE x Length Required PE

Set: 26.0 Doors: 233, 100, 111, 200, 201 3 Hinge TA714 US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (classroom) 9K37R 14D 626 BE 1 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE 1 Door Closer 4040XP EDA AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO
































Set: 27.0 Doors: 131, 125 3 Hinge TA714 US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (classroom) 9K37R 14D 626 BE 1 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE 1 Door Closer 4040XP REG AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO

Set: 28.0 Doors: 116, 105.1, FH05 3 Hinge TA714 US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (classroom) 9K37R 14D 626 BE 1 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE 1 Surface Overhead Stop 10-X36 630 RF 1 Door Closer 4040XP REG AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO

Set: 29.0 Doors: 120A, 121A, 109A, 110A, FH04 3 Hinge TA714 US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (privacy) 9K30L 14D 626 BE 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO 1 Gasketing S88D PE

Set: 30.0 Doors: 129A, 130A, 122, 123 3 Hinge TA714 US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (privacy) 9K30L 14D 626 BE





























1 Door Closer 4040XP EDA AL LC 2 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO 1 Gasketing S88D PE

Set: 31.0 Doors: 118, 123, 107, 114 3 Heavyweight Hinge TA786 US26D MK 1 Deadbolt 8T37S 626 BE 1 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE 1 Push Plate 70C-RKW US32D-316 RO 1 Pull Plate 107x70C US32D-316 RO 1 Door Closer 4040XP REG AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO

Set: 32.0

Doors: 112-1, 112-2, 113-1, 114, 117, 124, 126, 101-1, 101-2, 102-1, 103, 106, 115, 117 3 Heavyweight Hinge TA786 US26D MK 1 Deadbolt 8T37S 626 BE 1 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE 1 Push Plate 70C-RKW US32D-316 RO 1 Pull Plate 107x70C US32D-316 RO 1 Door Closer 4040XP EDA AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO

Set: 33.0 Doors: 114C-1, 114C-2, 103C-1, 103C-2 1 Continuous Hinge FM300 x Length Required 630 MR



































1 Deadbolt 8T37S 626 BE 1 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE 1 Push Plate 70C-RKW US32D-316 RO 1 Pull Plate 107x70C US32D-316 RO 1 Surface Overhead Stop 10-X36 630 RF 1 Door Closer 4040XP REG AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO

Set: 34.0 Doors: 113-2, 102-2 1 Continuous Hinge FM300 x Length Required 630 MR 1 Deadbolt 8T37S 626 BE 1 Core As Required To Match Facility Standard BE 1 Push Plate 70C-RKW US32D-316 RO 1 Pull Plate 107x70C US32D-316 RO 1 Door Closer 4040XP REG AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO

Set: 35.0 Doors: 125-2, 128-2, C100-1, 112-2 1 Cylinder As Required 626 BE Notes: Balance of hardware provided by door supplier.

Set: 36.0

NOT USED Doors: 116-2

1 All Hardware Provided By Door Supplier OT




















Set: ALTERNATE - 100.0 Doors: DG001 (x4) 1 Continuous Hinge CFM HD1 x Length Required PE 1 Cylindrical Lock (classroom) 9K37R 14D 626 BE


1 Door Closer 4040XP SHCUSH AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO


1 Gasketing 305CR (Head & Jambs) PE 1 Rain Guard 346C x Door Width +4" PE 1 Sweep 3452CNB x Length Required PE

Set: ALTERNATE - 101.0

Doors: SB001

2 Continuous Hinge CFM HD1 x Length Required PE 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 2 Manual Flush Bolt 555 / 557 (As Required) US26D RO 1 Cylindrical Lock (storeroom) 9K37D 14D 626 BE


2 Door Closer 4040XP SCUSH AL LC


1 Gasketing 305CR (Head & Jambs) PE 1 Rain Guard 346C x Door Width +4" PE 2 Sweep 3452CNB x Length Required PE 1 Astragal 357SP x Length Required PE


Doors: FH01

1 Continuous Hinge CFM HD1 x Length Required PE 1 Deadbolt 8T37S 626 BE


1 Push Plate 70C-RKW US32D- RO





























316

1 Pull Plate 107x70C US32D-316 RO

1 Door Closer 4040XP REG AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO

1 Threshold 171A MS25SS x Length Required PE

1 Gasketing 305CR (Head & Jambs) PE 1 Sweep 315CN x Length Required PE


Doors: FH02

1 Continuous Hinge CFM HD1 x Length Required PE 1 Rim Exit Device (classrooom) LC 16 8843 ETP US32D SA


2 Cylinder 1E-74 / 1E-72 626 BE 1 Door Closer 4040XP SCUSH AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO



Set: ALTERNATE - 202.0 Doors: FH03

3 Hinge TA714 US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (storeroom) 9K37D 14D 626 BE


1 Door Closer 4040XP REG AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO






























Doors: FH04

3 Hinge TA714 US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (privacy) 9K30L 14D 626 BE 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO


Doors: FH05

3 Hinge TA714 US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (classroom) 9K37R 14D 626 BE


1 Surface Overhead Stop 10-X36 630 RF 1 Door Closer 4040XP REG AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO


Doors: PB01, PB02

3 Hinge TA714 US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (office) 9K37AB 14D 626 BE


1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D PE 1 Door Bottom PDB411AE x Length Required PE


Doors: PB03

1 Continuous Hinge CFM HD1 x Length Required PE 1 Cylindrical Lock (classroom) 9K37R 14D 626 BE


1 Door Closer 4040XP SHCUSH AL LC


























1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO




Doors: TB001

1 Continuous Hinge CFM HD1 x Length Required PE 1 Cylindrical Lock (storeroom) 9K37D 14D 626 BE


1 Door Closer 4040XP REG AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO

1 Threshold 169A MSES25SS x Length Required PE

1 Gasketing 305CR (Head & Jambs) PE 1 Sweep 315CN x Length Required PE 1 Rain Guard 346C x Door Width +4" PE 1 Sweep 345AV x Length Required PE


Doors: TB002

1 Cylinder As Required 626 PE

Notes: Balance of hardware provided by door supplier.























SCHRADERGROUP architecture LLC GLAZING Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 088000 - Page 1 SGA Project: 16-020.3

SECTION 088000 – GLAZING ADDENDUM NO. 4

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

1. Windows. 2. Doors. 3. Storefront framing. 4. Glazed entrances. 5. Curtain walls. 6. Interior borrowed lites.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.


A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Glass Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- square Samples for glass.

1. Insulating glass for each designation indicated. 2. Laminated glass.

C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets, sealants, and colored spacers, in 12-inch lengths. Fire rated sealants.

D. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For installers and manufacturers of insulating-glass units.

B. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for insulating glass and glazing sealants.

1. For glazing sealants, including fire rated glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period.

D. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.




A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated-glass manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Refer Division 08 Sections “Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts” and “Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls”.

2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.9 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.

2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.

3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

4. Schedule enough time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.



B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.

1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Light Diffusing Glazing: Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Okalux Plus as manufactured by Okalux North America, or comparable product by one of the following.

1. Panelite. 2. Approved Equal.

B. All Other Glazing: Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Guardian Industries glazing units, or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Viracon. 2. JE Berkowitz. 3. PPG Industries.

C. Basis-of-Design Products for Fire Resistive Glass: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide SAFTI FIRST glazing units, or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Technical Glass Products. 2. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain North America, Inc.

D. Basis-of-Design Products for One-Way Mirror Glass: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Pilkington glazing units.

E. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

1. Obtain tinted glass from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Obtain reflective-coated glass from single source from single manufacturer.

F. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.


A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to ASTM E 1300 by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria:

1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.



a. Wind Design Data: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load.

3. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch, whichever is less.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

D. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites of thickness indicated.

2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.

3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite.

4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K).

5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.

6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual.”

2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."



B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC

D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.

E. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.

2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.

1. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 2. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other

uncoated glass).

C. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated

D. Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition B, Type I, Quality-Q3, and complying with other requirements specified.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Guardian, Inc.; Ceramic Frit.

2. Glass: Clear float (low iron glass).



3. Ceramic Coating Color: Frit and spandrel on #4 surface. Frit pattern and color as selected.

E. One-Way Mirror Glass: Annealed float glass as specified except Quality Q1.


a. Pilkington; Mirropane glazing units.

2. Minimum Thickness: 1/4 inch.

3. Performance Data: Visible Reflectance Glass Side 16 percent; Visible Reflectance coated Side 68 percent; Visible Transmittance 11 percent; Glass Substrate Grey.

F. Fire Resistive Gel Filled Safety Glass: Transparent fire-resistive safety glazing fabricated from two lites of tempered glass as specified, gel filled and sealed.


a. SAFTI; Superlite II.-XL.

2. Thickness: Manufacturer’s standard for applications indicated. 3. Fire Rating: 60 and 120 minute rating as listed in UL Building Materials

Directory and approved by authority having jurisdiction for applications indicated.

4. Safety Glazing: Comply with CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Category II.

G. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.

1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer unless fire-protection or fire-resistance rating is based on another product.

2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness as needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated

2.5 LIGHT DIFFUSING INSULATING-GLASS UNITS

A. Light Diffusing Insulated-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace with capillary slab and fiber tissue for light diffusion, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer’s standard primary and secondary. 2. Spacers Specifications: Manufacturer’s standard spacer material and

construction.



B. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in “Glass Products” Article as indicated by designations in “Insulating-Glass Types” Article.

2.6 INSULATING-GLASS UNITS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer’s standard primary and secondary. 2. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.

B. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article as indicated by designations in "Insulating-Glass Types" Article.

2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 290. d. Pecora Corporation; 890. e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990. f. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.

C. Fire-Resistant Glazing Materials: Materials used to obtain required fire-resistant rating, as approved by glass manufacturer.

2.8 GLAZING TAPES










A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

2.10 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned EPDM, silicone, or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.

2.11 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS



A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.



D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows:

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.



C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants



cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

3.8 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES - SCHEDULE

A. Clear fully tempered float glass.

1. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2. Provide safety glazing labeling.

B. Ceramic-coated spandrel glass, heat-strengthened float glass – Guardian Industries.

1. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2. Ceramic Coating Color: Frit on #3 surface and spandrel on #4 surface. Frit

pattern and color as selected. 3. Fallout Resistance: Passes fallout-resistance test in ASTM C 1048 for an

assembly of glass and adhered reinforcing material.

C. Laminated Glass:

1. Thickness: Minimum 1 inch.

D. One-Way Mirror Glass:



1. Thickness: ¼ inch. 2. Install mirror coating toward subject-side.

E. Fire Resistive Gel Filled Safety Glass: 1. Thickness as required to meet 60, 90,120 minute fire rating. 2. Fire rated glazing materials.

3.9 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES - SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type I: Guardian Industries SN 68:

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 1/4 inch. 3. Outdoor Lite: Guardian SunGuard, SuperNeutral 68 on Clear. 4. Interspace Content: 1/2 inch air space. 5. Indoor Lite: Clear Heat Strengthened glass. 6. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 percent maximum. 7. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.28 maximum. 8. Visible Light Transmittance: 68 percent minimum. 9. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.38 maximum.

B. Glass Type 2: Guardian Industries SN 68

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 1/4 inch. 3. Outdoor Lite: Guardian SunGuard, SuperNeutral 68 on Clear. 4. Interspace Content: 1/2 inch air space. 5. Indoor Lite: Spandrel glass, Color to be selected 6. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum. 7. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.28 maximum. 8. Visible Light Transmittance: 21 percent minimum. 9. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.27 maximum.

C. Glass Type 3: Guardian Industries SN 54

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 1/4 inch. 3. Outdoor Lite: Guardian SunGuard, SuperNeutral 54 on Clear. 4. Interspace Content: 1/2 inch air space. 5. Indoor Lite: Clear Heat Strengthened glass. 6. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum. 7. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.27 maximum. 8. Visible Light Transmittance: 54 percent minimum. 9. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.28 maximum.

D. Glass Type 4: Guardian Industries SN 54

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 1/4 inch.



3. Outdoor Lite: Guardian SunGuard, SuperNeutral 54 on Clear. 4. Interspace Content: 1/2 inch air space. 5. Indoor Lite: Spandrel glass Color to be selected. 1. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum. 2. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.27 maximum. 3. Visible Light Transmittance: 17 percent minimum. 4. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.20 maximum.

E. Glass Type 5: Interior Glazing, not insulating glass. F. Glass Type 6: Okalux Plus

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 1/4 inch. 3. Outdoor Lite: Guardian SunGuard, SuperNeutral 68 on Clear. 4. Interspace Content: 1/2 inch air space. 5. Indoor Lite: Clear Heat Strengthened glass. 6. U-Factor: 0.24 maximum. 7. Visible Light Transmittance: 25 percent. 8. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 14 percent maximum.



SCHRADERGROUP architecture LLC LINEAR WOOD CEILINGS Philadelphia, PA 095426 - Page 1 SGA Project 16-020.3

SECTION 095426 – LINEAR WOOD CEILINGS ADDENDUM NO. 4

PART 1 – GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Concealed suspension system for Linear Wood Ceiling Panels.

2. Linear Wood Ceiling Panels for concealed suspension system.

3. Trim and accessories.

4. Seismic restraints for suspended ceiling system.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A 641: Standard Specification for Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire; 1992.

B. ASTM C 423: Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method; 1990.

C. ASTMC C 635: Standard Specifications for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings.

D. ASTM C 636: Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels; 1992.

E. ASTM E 84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 1991.

F. ASTM E 580: Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint; 1991.

G. AWI (QSI): Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; 2003.

H. CISCA: Ceiling Systems Handbook.




A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer, approved by wood ceiling manufacturer, who has completed panel ceilings similar in species, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Inspection: All work must pass inspection and approval of architect, as well as the local codes and regulations or authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Single-Source Responsibility for Wood Ceiling System: Obtain each type of Linear Wood Ceiling Panels from a single fabricator, with in-house Shop Drawing capabilities, in-house assembly and finishing capabilities, and with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the project.

D. Single-Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying project.

E. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product Data: For each type of product specified.

C. Samples: For verification of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size indicated below. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the range of variations expected.

1. 12” x 18” samples of each panel type, pattern, and color.

1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS & COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings/Coordination Drawings for all ceilings, which should include RCP and product details. Coordinate Linear Wood ceiling panels layout and installation of wood panels and suspension system components with other construction elements that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system components, partition assemblies and all perimeter conditions.


A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install wood panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is completed and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.




A. Delivery & Unloading: Coordinate crate sizes, weights, unloading options, and delivery schedule with manufacturer prior to fabrication. Deliver wood panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other mistreatment.

B. Acclimatization: Before installing wood panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content (at least 72 hours) per AWI standards.

C. Handling: Handle Linear Wood Ceiling Panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.

D. Protection:

1. Personnel: Follow good safety and industrial hygiene practices during handling and installing of all products and systems, with personnel to take necessary precautions and wear appropriate protective equipment as needed. Read related literature for important information on products before installation. Contractor to be solely responsible for all personal safety issues during and subsequent to installation; architect, specifier, owner, and manufacturer will rely on contractor’s performance in such regard.

2. Existing completed work: Protect completed work above suspension system from damage during installation of suspension system components.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS/WARRANTIES

A. Extra Materials: Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents.

1. Linear Wood Ceiling Panels: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.

2. Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each component equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.

B. Warranties: Provide owner with a (1) year warranty for material and workmanship on all installed products.

1. Manufacturers: All materials, wood ceiling and grid, shall be warranted for (1) one year for material and workmanship.

2. Installer: All work shall be warranted for (1) year from final acceptance of completed work.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS



2.1 LINEAR WOOD CEILING PANELS AND SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. General: The following manufacturer is basis of design:

1. 9Wood, Inc. (www.9wood.com): 2100 Panelized Linear.

B. Or equal, as prior approved by architect.

2.2 LINEAR WOOD CEILING PANELS

A. Basis of Design: 9Wood, Inc. Linear, Series 2000

1. Wood Panels: 2100 Panelized Linear, SKU 2114-3.

1) Species: European Beech.

2) Member Size: 3 ¼” x ¾”.

3) Edge Profile: Square.

4) Reveal: ¾”.

5) Members/LF: 3 Members.

6) Assembly Style: Cross Piece Backer

7) Panel Sizes: 1’ x 8’, 1’ x 6’.

8) Fire Rating: N/A.

9) Finish: Clear Interior Finish.

2. All field or factory cuts shall receive stain and finish.

2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Metal T-Grid Suspension System: Provide standard interior Metal Heavy Duty 15/16” suspension T-Grid system using Main Runners, Cross-tees, Wall Angle or Shadow Moldings of types, structural classifications, and black finishes indicated and that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements. Comply with all applicable seismic codes and ordinances. Entirety of suspension system including access panel attachment shall receive black finish.

B. Attachment Devices: Size for 3 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated.

C. Wire, Braces, Ties, Hanger Rods, Flat Hangers and Angle Hangers: Provide wires, rods and hangers that comply with applicable ASTM specifications.



D. Access Panels: Provide threaded T-bolt Attachment system for minimum (1) panel every 4 linear feet on center.

2.4 ACOUSTIC PADS

A. General: Basis-of-Design is fiberglass encapsulated pads and rolls by ‘Creative Materials for Acoustics’ or approved equal.

B. Material

1. Size: 2” x 1.5#.

2. Type: PVC.

3. Color: Black.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. General: Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceilings attach or abut, with installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other Sections.

B. Layout: Measure each ceiling area and establish the layout of Linear Wood Ceiling Panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and conform to the layout shown on reflected ceiling plans in accordance with wood ceiling manufacturer’s approved Shop Drawings.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install 9Wood, Inc. Interior Panelized Linear, Style 2100 to comply with manufacturer's instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Attachments: Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members per manufacturer’s instructions and in compliance with all local codes and regulations.

C. Installation of Metal T-Bar Grid: Install, align, brace, tie-off, mount, handle interferences, and space suspension T-Grid in accordance with suspension manufacturer’s instructions and in compliance with all local codes and regulations.



D. Installation of Panelized Linear Wood (Style 2100): Install Linear Wood ceiling panels in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and in compliance with all local codes and regulations. Install with undamaged edges and fitted accurately to suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit, as required.

E. Suspension Runners: Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Install number and use on-center spacing per wood ceiling manufacturer’s instructions, as indicated on approved Shop Drawings and in compliance with all local codes.

3.4 CLEANING

A. General: Clean exposed wood surfaces of 9Wood, Inc. Style 2100 Linear Wood Ceiling Panels. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace wood ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.



SCHRADERGROUP architecture LLC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Philadelphia, PA 096519 - Page 1 SGA Project 16-020.3

SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING ADDENDUM NO. 4

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Vinyl composition floor tile.



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

1. Show details of special patterns.

C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.

D. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.



1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation indicated.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups for floor tile including resilient base and accessories.

a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color, and pattern in locations directed by Architect.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.


A. Store floor tile, resilient base, and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile and resilient base during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation.

2. During installation.

3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.



E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Tarkett; Vinyl Composition Tile, or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Armstong World Industries, Inc.

B. Refer to Finish Schedule on Drawings for manufacturers, products, styles, and colors.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.



1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install floor tiles and resilient base until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile.

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles in pattern indicated.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

1. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated.



D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.

2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.

3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply floor polish in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.






SCHRADERGROUP architecture LLC DIGITALLY PRINTED VINYL WALLCOVERING MURALS Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 097200 - Page 1 SGA Project: 16-020.3

SECTION 097200 - DIGITALLY PRINTED VINYL WALLCOVERING MURALS ADDENDUM NO. 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide digitally printed/embossed wallcovering complete. B. Related Sections

1. Division 09 - Gypsum Board: Wall Substrates. 2. Division 09- Painting: Preparation and priming of substrate surfaces. 3. Division 26 - Lighting: Permanent during installation.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. E84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

B. Wallcovering Association

1. W-101 2011 Quality Standard for Polymer Coated Fabric Wallcovering

C. Federal Specifications (FedSpec):

1. CCC-W-408A - D Wallcovering, Vinyl Coated

D. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL)

1. UL 723: Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

E. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA)

1. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code 2. NFPA 286 Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall

and Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth. 1.4 SUBMITTALS



A. Submit Color Proof for approval prior to manufacture of a full size miniature mural. B. Submit full size miniature strike-off for approval prior to the manufacture of full size

mural. C. Submit manufacturers' product data and installation instructions for each digitally printed

wallcovering mural, adhesive and accessory required.

1. Include data on physical properties, durability, fade resistance, fire hazard classification, fire-test response characteristics, and fire detection characteristics of wallcovering.

2. Include manufacturer's recommendations for maximum permissible moisture

content of substrates.

D. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of each wall-covering type. Indicate pattern placement, seams and termination points.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of wall covering and for each color, pattern,

texture and finish specified, submit full-size samples, 12 inches wide by 12 inches long in size, cut from current production of each ground wallcovering selected to demonstrate quality, weight, color, and embossing.

F. Submit manufacturer's written product certification that all furnished wallcovering ground

meets or exceeds the specification requirements. Include certified copies of tests specified.

G. Submit wallcovering ground manufacturer's written instructions for recommended

maintenance of each type of wallcovering required. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Product Test Reports: For each wall covering, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and

that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Wall-Covering Materials: For each type, color, texture, and finish, full width by length

equal to 5 percent of amount installed.



1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Provide each type of digitally printed vinyl wallcovering mural required

produced by one manufacturer whose published product literature clearly indicates compliance of wallcovering ground with specified requirements.

B. Applicator: Installation by skilled commercial wallcovering applicators with no less than

three years of documented experience installing wallcovering murals of the types and extent specified for the project.

C. Material Standards: Provide materials that meet or exceed Federal Specification CCC-

W-408A - D and W-101 2011 Quality Standard for Polymer Coated Fabric Wallcovering Type II.

D. Physical Properties: Provide wallcovering with the following physical properties when

tested in accordance with ASTM D751. 1. Total weight: 21 oz./lin. yard 2. Tensile Strength: 50 X 55 Minimum (W x F) 3. Tear Strength: 25 X 25 Minimum (W x F)

E. Fire Hazard Classification: Provide materials that comply with Class A fire rating when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

F. Underwriters Laboratories approval: Provide materials that have been tested and

approved by Underwriters Laboratories. Provide proof of UL labeling on every roll assuring complete compliance with all specifications and requirements through continuous inspection by UL inspectors.

G. Smoke Toxicity: Provide materials that have been tested for smoke toxicity and

approved for use by New York City Materials and Equipment Acceptance Division (MEA).

H Fire Detection Characteristics: Provide materials that have been laboratory tested for the

Early Warning Effect in accordance with ASTM E 603. Submit test results certifying that when one square foot section of the material is heated to 300 degrees F, the wallcovering emits an odorless, colorless non-toxic vapor that will activate an ionization smoke detector.

1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A Deliver digitally printed vinyl wallcovering mural to the project site in unbroken and undamaged wrappings and clearly labeled with the manufacturer's identification label, quality or grade, UL label and sidemark.

B. Store materials in a clean, dry storage area with temperature maintained above 55

degrees with normal humidity. C. Store material in a flat position to prevent damage to roll-ends. Do not cross stack

material. Support material off the floor in a manner to prevent sagging and warping.




A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wall coverings until spaces are

enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at levels intended for occupants after Project completion during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Do not apply digitally printed wallcovering mural when surface and ambient

temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the wallcovering manufacturer.

C. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain substrate surface and

ambient temperatures above 60 degrees F unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

D. Apply adhesive only when substrate surface temperature or ambient temperature is

above 60 degrees F, or relative humidity is below 40 percent.

E. Maintain constant recommended temperature and humidity for at least 72 hours prior to, throughout the installation period and for 72 hours after wallcovering installation completion.

F. Provide not less than an 80 foot candles per square foot lighting level minimum

measured midheight at substrate surfaces. 1.11 WARRANTY

A. Submit manufacturer's 5 year written warranty against manufacturing defects. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified

testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS



A. Digitally Printed Wallcovering Mural: Basis of Design - MDC Studio Digital Solutions Digitally Printed Wallcovering Murals manufactured by MDC, 400 High Grove Blvd., Glendale Heights, Illinois; subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work are limited to the following:

1. Blue Mountain Wallcoverings 2. DesignTex, Inc.; Steelcase

B. Description: Provide mildew-resistant products in rolls from same production run and

complying with the following:

1. ASTM F 793 for wall coverings. a. Category: III, Decorative with High Serviceability

C. Repeat: Minimum Dots Per Inch: 150 DPI D. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Match Architect’s samples. 2.3 MATERIALS

A. Digital Image: Owner Architect to provide PDF file of image to be digitally printed on

MDC Studio Digitally Printed Ground, applied as indicated on Drawings. 2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesives: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, strippable adhesive, heavy-duty premixed

vinyl adhesive for use with specific wall covering and substrate application indicated and as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.

B. Substrate Primer/Sealer: Mildew resistant type, as recommended in writing by

primer/sealer and wall-covering manufacturers for intended substrate; white pigmented alkyd or acrylic/latex base primer specifically formulated for use with vinyl wallcoverings.

C. Metal Moldings and Trims: Extruded aluminum, alloy 6063-T5, long lengths, with fine

satin mechanical finish and class 2 clear architectural anodic coating conforming to AA M21A31 designed for use with vinyl wallcoverings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and installation conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Test substrates with a suitable moisture meter and verify that moisture content does not

exceed 4 percent.



C. Verify substrate surfaces are clean, dry, smooth, structurally sound and free from

surface defects and imperfections that would show through the finished surface. D. Evaluate all painted surfaces for the possibility of pigment bleed-through. E. Notify the contractor and architect in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper

and timely completion of the installation. Beginning of installation means acceptance of surface conditions.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil,

grease, mold, mildew, and incompatible primers. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of

flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. D. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture

trims, and similar items. E. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation

areas not less than 24 hours before installation. 3.3 WALL-COVERING INSTALLATION

A. Allow digitally printed vinyl wallcovering mural to acclimatize to the area of installation a minimum of 24 hours before installation.

B. Before cutting, examine image and color and determine that they are the correct image

and color as specified for the correct location. C. Coordinate gypsum drywall seams to the greatest extent possible to limit the number of

seams within wall covering zone. D. Comply with wall-covering manufacturer’s written installation instructions applicable to

products and applications indicated. E. Read and follow the instructions in the manufacturer's installation sheet contained in

each roll of the digitally printed vinyl wallcovering mural. F. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change the roll numbers at partition

breaks and corners. G. Install strips in same order as cut from roll.



H. Install wall covering without lifted or curling edges and without visible shrinkage. I. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams

without overlaps or gaps between strips. J. Use adhesive recommended by the wallcovering manufacturer. K. Install each panel in sequence as indicated on the drawings. L. If there are variations in color or image that are considered to be excessive, notify the

manufacturer's representative for an inspection before any further wallcovering is installed.

M. Smooth wallcovering to the hanging surface using a stiff bristled sweep brush to fully

bond wall covering to substrate and eliminate air bubbles, wrinkles, gaps, overlaps, and other defects.

N. Remove excess adhesive along finished seams immediately after each wallcovering

strip applied. Use clean warm water, a natural sponge and clean towels. Change water often to maintain water cleanliness.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Remove excess adhesive at seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. D. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture

trims, and similar items. E. Upon completion of the work, remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting

from the wallcovering installation. Leave areas in neat clean and orderly condition.






SCHRADERGROUP architecture LLC INTERIOR WALL PANEL SYSTEM APPLICATION Philadelphia, PA 097700 - Page 1 SGA Project 16-020.3

SECTION 097700 - INTERIOR WALL PANEL SYSTEM APPLICATION ADDENDUM NO. 4 PART 1 – GENERAL



1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prefinished interior wall panel system application.

B. Trim and accessories for attaching wall panels, including fastenings, accessory features, connections to the building structure, and other items not mentioned specifically herein, and which are necessary to make a complete installation.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 06- Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry.

B. Division 07 - Joint Sealants.

C. Division 09 - Gypsum Board. D. Division 09 – Interior Painting.

E. Division 12 - Manufactured Plastic-Laminate-Faced Casework.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work Quality: All work of this Section to be manufactured and constructed,

assembled and installed by skilled craft persons in finish carpentry. All such work to be accurately fabricated, assembled, joined and expertly finished in accordance with measurements taken on the job-site.

B. Defective Work: All work, work not true to line, not in satisfactory operating condition, improperly installed, damaged or marred will not be accepted. Remedy, remove or replace defective work as directed by the Architect.



C. Standards: All applicable Sections of the "Manual of Millwork" and current supplements published by the Woodwork Institute for the construction types and grades hereinafter specified. All modifications to such standards shown on the Contract Drawings and approved Shop Drawings or specified shall govern.

D. Manufacturer: Provide wall panels produced by one manufacturer whose published product literature clearly indicates compliance with specifications.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit four samples, 8”x11”, of each color, and texture of specified products. B. Submit the following Quality Assurance Submittals:

1. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.

2. Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.

3. Wood veneer, plastic and metal laminate, when MDF used, all panels must have back balance.

C. Shop Drawing: Prior to fabrication and delivery, submit shop drawings clearly

indicating:

1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

2. Load capacities, assembly characteristics, and furnished accessories.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store materials in the manufacturer’s original protective packaging.

Store materials in an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Do work of this Section in a fully coordinated and cooperative manner with work of other trades to provide complete and proper installation and to expedite the job without delays.

B. Secure field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication

where possible, for proper and adequate fabrication and installation of the work. C. Priming and back-painting of all carpentry and millwork is specified in Division 09 -

Painting. Do not set items until priming and back-painting have been completed.



D. Where interior wall panels are clad around outside corners of a room, the drywall installer should avoid installing drywall corner beads, as this makes shimming the interior wall panels very difficult.

E. Protect all work against damage of any kind until final acceptance of the building.

Repair or replace damaged work to the satisfaction of the Architect without additional cost to the Owner.

F. Provide adequate ventilation and acclimate panels per Woodwork Institute Manual of

Millwork.

1.8 WARRANTY A. Wall panel to be warranted against delamination for 2 years following Substantial

Completion. The factory authorized fabricator, product installer and material manufacturer must sign and date the Warranty documents and submit a copy to the Contractor for the warranty to be valid.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. These specifications are based on prefinished interior wall panels as manufactured by WILSONART INTERNATIONAL INC and the wall panel trim and connectors as manufactured by Monarch Metal Fabrication, Bohemia, NY (basis of design).

B. Other manufacturers include the following: Armstrong, Wall Panel Systems, Inc.

C. All panel products specified in this section shall be provided by a single manufacturer.

2.2 MATERIALS A. Wall Panel Basis of design: WILSONART INTERNATIONAL INC colors and

surface texture as specified by Architect. Panels are to be fabricated as per Drawings.

B. Thickness: A thickness of 3/4” is approved for interior wall panels with concealed

fasteners, “Z” clip installations on the back of each panel. C. Panel color/texture: One (1) color to be selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s

standard color pallet which may include metallic look, wood grains, or solid colors.



2.3 FABRICATION A. All Wall Panel System WPS fabrications, system trims per plans details and panel

clips shall be factory installed on the back of all panels.

B. Panel edges shall be finished with same material as panel.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Panels shall be of material specifically designed for wall cladding. Fabricated panels shall comply with all current codes and regulations. Panels shall have uniform thickness (+0.03”) and flatness (maximum difference of 0.03”) for 10-foot span.

B. Flame spread (ASTM E-84): Panels to be UL registered and labeled for quality

consistency. a. Class 1 or Class A.

2.5 SUB-FRAME ASSEMBLY

A. Monarch Wall Panel Systems, Inc. Aluminum “Z” clips and trim to be manufactured specifically to meet the following requirements:

1. Support the weight of panels. 2. Fasteners for panel assembly to be designed to maintain consistent flatness

at each joint between panels. 3. Capable of supporting/retaining panels up to 6’ high by 12’ wide. 4. Allow minimum 3/8" ventilation gap between the wall and the back side of the

panel clip to prevent condensation behind the panels. 5. System to allow interchanging of components at a later date, with a dry-fit

installation. No liquid adhesives to be used.

B. Trim and Clip Material

1. Where not visible: Al 6061-T6. 2. Where visible: Al 6063-T5. 3. Thickness: not less than 0.62”.

C. All fasteners to be by Monarch Metal Fabrication per engineering calculations spec. D. Panel trim for joints, edges, and corners to be from Monarch Metal Trim; basis of

design to be 3/4” (as appropriate for thickness of wall panels) Easy Wall Panel-Narrow Reveal System (3/16”) to fit ¾” panel (as appropriate for thickness of wall panels) or approved equal. Refer to drawings for locations of reveals, edge, and corner trim.



1. Finish:

a. Clear Satin Anodized Aluminum


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install panels and fixing system as per Monarch Metal Fabrication Wall Panel Systems engineering approved shop drawings and specifications.

B. Install aluminum sub-frame to support the “Z” clip sub-frame assembly.

C. Maximum fixing distances:

a. 2 fixing points in one direction using: 3/4” panel is 33”. b. 3 or more fixing points in one direction: 3/4” panel is 37”.

D. The installation of the panel clip system shall be true and plumb. E. Distance from the face of finished GWB wall to face of wood panels is to be 1-1/8”

for plastic laminate +/- shimming as required.

F. Installed panels shall have vertical joints with splines routed directly along the center of the panel edge to ensure that all four intersecting panels are held in the same plane.

G. Monarch Metal Fabrication Wall Panel Systems engineering shop drawings must

be reviewed and approved by the Architect. All panels shall be labeled and numbered; indicate exact size of each panel and dimensions of panel trim on shop drawings; coordinate with the Drawings.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. After installation, the installer/contractor shall protect the panels from damage. The panels shall be kept free from paint, plaster, cement, scratches, or any other destructive forces.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Panels to be cleaned with standard cleaning solution. Mild solvents approved by the Manufacturer prior to use may be used to remove stubborn marks and dirt.

B. Repair or replace all damaged material to the satisfaction of the Architect and/or

Owner.



C. Installed areas or portions of the work shall be inspected by Architect or General Contractor and must be approved immediately following completion of such areas prior to application of same system elsewhere in the project.



SCHRADERGROUP architecture LLC ACOUSTIC ROOM COMPONENTS Philadelphia, PA 098400 - Page 1 SGA Project 16-020.3

SECTION 098400 - ACOUSTIC ROOM COMPONENTS ADDENDUM NO. 4

PART 1 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes shop-fabricated, fabric-wrapped panel units tested for acoustical performance, including:

1. Sound-absorbing wall panels.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International:

1. ASTM C423 Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.

2. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

3. ASTM E795 Standard Practice for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorption Tests.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

B. SAA: Sound Absorption Average.


A. Product Data: For each type of fabric facing, panel edge, core material, and mounting indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For sound-absorbing wall units. Include mounting devices and details; details at panel head, base, joints, and corners; and details at ceiling, floor base, and wall intersections. Indicate panel edge and core materials.



1. Include elevations showing panel sizes and direction of fabric weave and pattern matching.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fabric facing from sound-absorbing wall unit manufacturer's full range.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Fabric: Full-width by approximately 36-inch long Sample, but not smaller than required to show complete pattern repeat, from dye lot to be used for the Work, and with specified treatments applied. Mark top and face of fabric.

2. Panel Edge: 12-inch- long Sample(s) showing each edge profile, corner, and finish.

3. Core Material: 12-inch- square Sample at corner.

4. Mounting Devices: Full-size Samples.

5. Assembled Panels: Approximately 36 by 36 inches, including joints and mounting methods.


A. Coordination Drawings: Elevations and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Electrical outlets, switches, and thermostats. 2. Items penetrating or covered by sound-absorbing wall units including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Alarms. e. Sprinklers. f. Access panels.

3. Show operation of hinged and sliding components covered by or adjacent to sound-absorbing wall units.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of sound-absorbing wall unit, from manufacturer.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For sound-absorbing wall units to include in maintenance manuals. Include fabric manufacturers' written cleaning and stain-removal recommendations.



1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials from same production run that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fabric: For each fabric, color, and pattern installed, provide length equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 10 yards.

2. Mounting Devices: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than five devices, including unopened adhesives.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain sound-absorbing wall units from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide sound-absorbing wall units meeting the following as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing per ASTME84.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 200 or less.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials, fabrication, and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as directed by Architect.


D. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Comply with fabric and sound-absorbing wall unit manufacturers' written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature and humidity requirements for shipment, storage, and handling.

B. Deliver materials and units in unopened bundles and store in a temperature-controlled dry place with adequate air circulation.




A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install sound-absorbing wall units until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work at and above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Air-Quality Limitations: Protect sound-absorbing wall units from exposure to airborne odors, such as tobacco smoke, and install units under conditions free from odor contamination of ambient air.

C. Field Measurements: Verify locations of sound-absorbing wall units and actual dimensions of openings and penetrations by field measurements before fabrication.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sound-absorbing wall units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Acoustical performance. b. Fabric sagging, distorting, or releasing from panel edge. c. Warping of core.

2. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS

A. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Soundsoak Acoustical Walls, or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Acoustical Panel Systems (APS, Inc.).

2. Acoustical Solutions, Inc.

3. Benton Brothers Solutions, Inc.

4. Decoustics Limited; a CertainTeed Ceilings company.

5. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.

6. MBI Products Company, Inc.

7. Panel Solutions, Inc.

8. Sound Management Group LLC.

9. ESSI Acoustical Products











10. Working Walls, Inc.

11. G &S Acoustics

B. Sound-Absorbing Wall Panels: Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of facing material laminated to front face, edges, and back edge border of core.

1. Mounting: Back mounted with manufacturer's standard metal clips or bar hangers, secured to substrate.

2. Core: Manufacturer's standard glass-fiber board.

3. Edge Construction: Manufacturer's standard chemically hardened core with no frame.

4. Edge Profile: Bevel

5. Corner Detail in Elevation: As indicated on Drawings with continuous edge profile indicated.

6. Reveals between Panels: Varies. Reference drawings.

7. Facing Material: Guildford of Maine FR701

8. Acoustical Performance: Sound absorption NRC of not less than 0.65 according to ASTM C 423 for Type A mounting according to ASTM E 795.

9. Nominal Thickness: 2” thick

10. Panel Width: As indicated on Drawings

11. Panel Height: As indicated on Drawings

C. High Impact Acoustical Panels:

1. Thickness: 2 1/8 inches (54 mm). 2. Size: As indicated on the drawings up to a maximum 48 inch (1219 mm) x

120 inch (3048 mm) panel. 3. Core: 2 inches (51 mm) thick fiberglass, 6 - 7 pcf (96 - 112 kg/m3) density,

with bonded facing layer of 10 pcf (192 kg/m3), 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick impact resistant fiberglass.

4. Edge Detail: Beveled hardened with non-resin, Class A hardening solution. 5. Facing: 100% polyester fabric, FR 701 Style 2100 by Guilford of Maine

a. Color: As selected from fabric manufacturer’s full range of colors. 6. Sound Absorption (ASTM C423): Noise Reduction Coefficient as follows:

a. 1-1/8 inch (29 mm) Panel: 1.00, minimum. b. 2 1/8 inch (54 mm) Panel: 1.05, minimum.

7. Mounting: Back mounted with manufacturer’s standard metal clips or bar hangers, secured to substrate.




2.2 MATERIALS

A. Core Materials:

1. Glass-Fiber Board: ASTM C 612, Type standard with manufacturer; nominal density of 6 to 7 lb/cu. ft., unfaced, and dimensionally stable, molded rigid board; and with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

B. Facing Material: Guilford of Maine FR701 2100- color to be selected from full collection’s range of colors.

C. Mounting Devices: Concealed on back of unit, recommended by manufacturer to support weight of unit, type as indicated on Drawings.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Use manufacturer's standard construction except as otherwise indicated; with facing material applied to face, edges, and back border of dimensionally stable core; and with rigid edges to reinforce panel perimeter against warpage and damage.

1. Glass-Fiber Board Cores: Chemically harden core edges and areas of core where mounting devices are attached.

B. Facing Material: Apply fabric facing fully covering visible surfaces of unit; with material stretched straight, on the grain, tight, square, and free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams, adhesive, or other visible distortions or foreign matter.

C. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Plus or minus 1/16 inch for the following:

1. Thickness.

2. Edge straightness.

3. Overall length and width.

4. Squareness from corner to corner.

5. Chords, radii, and diameters.

D. High Impact Acoustic Panels: Wrap panel edges and return facing fabric 1 -2 inches (25.4 – 51 mm) on back panel. Secure fabric with adhesive applied to the edges and back of panel only.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



A. Examine fabric, fabricated units, substrates, areas, and conditions, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of sound-absorbing wall units.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sound-absorbing wall units in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other units, faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations.

B. Comply with sound-absorbing wall unit manufacturer's written instructions for installation of units using type of mounting devices indicated. Mount units securely to supporting substrate.

C. Align and level fabric pattern and grain among adjacent units.

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb and Level: Plus or minus 1/16 inch.

B. Variation of Panel Joints from Hairline: Not more than 1/16 inch wide.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials.

B. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.





SDST High School Additions and Renovations Phase III Erdenheim, PA

SCHRADERGROUP architecture LLC EXTERIOR PAINTING Philadelphia, PA 099113 - Page 1 SGA Project 16-020.3

SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING ADDENDUM NO. 4

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.

2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.

3. Label each coat of each Sample.

4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. VOC content.



1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 2. Coating Maintenance Manual: Upon conclusion of the project, the Contractor or

paint manufacturer/supplier shall furnish a coating maintenance manual, such as



Sherwin-Williams “Custodian Project Color and Product Information” report or equal from PPG PAINTS. Manual shall include an Area Summary with finish schedule, Area Detail designating where each product/color/finish was used, product data pages, Material Safety Data Sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.



A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance of requirements, products by Sherwin Williams are the basis of design and set the standard of quality required. 1. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Total VOC content will not be increased by tints and colorants required.

D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.

2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.

3. Wood: 15 percent.

4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=543&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456815061&mf=04&&mf=04&src=wd



D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

B. New and Previously painted substrates: Remove all dirt, dust, grease, oil, form release agents, loose and peeling paint and all contaminants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

2. Apply a penetrating sealer conditioner to previously painted and new concrete and masonry substrates.

3. Masonry, Concrete, Stucco and Block: Fill bugholes, airpockets, cracks and other voids with an elastomeric patch or sealant as reocommended by the paint manufacturer.

C. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

F. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.



H. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.

I. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system indicated.

2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic

wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

J. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.

3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed to view:

a. Equipment, including panelboards.



b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR SURFACES – LATEX

A. Total VOC content will not be increased by tints and colorants required.

B. Shop Primed Ferrous Metal: Semi-Gloss Acrylic Enamel:

1. Sherwin-Williams:

a. Primer: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer. b. Finish coats: Two coats Pro Industrial DTM Acrylic semi-gloss, B66 series.

C. Ferrous Metal: Semi-Gloss Acrylic Enamel:




a. Primer: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer. b. Finish: Two coats Pro Industrial DTM Acrylic semi-gloss, B66 series.

D. Galvanized Metals: Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel: Pretreat as required by manufacturer.


a. Primer: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer. b. Finish: Two coats Pro Industrial DTM Acrylic semi-gloss, B66 series.

E. Wood and Composite Siding (cementitious types) Flat Acrylic: For factory primed composite siding, primer may be omitted.


a. Composite Siding Primer: One coat Loxon Exterior Masonry Acrylic Primer. b. Wood Primer: One coat Exterior Latex Wood Primer. c. Finish: Two coats A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A6.

F. Wood and Composite Siding: Semi-Gloss Acrylic: For factory primed composite siding, primer may be omitted.


a. Composite Siding Primer: One coat Loxon Exterior Masonry Acrylic Primer. b. Wood Primer: Wood Primer: One coat Exterior Latex Wood Primer. c. Finish: Two coats A-100 Gloss.

G. Wood and Plastic, Previously Painted: High Gloss Latex Enamel:


a. Primer: One coat Multi-Purpose Primer, B51. b. Finish: Pro Industrial High Performance Acrylic gloss, B66-600 Series.

H. Wood and Plastic, New: High Gloss Latex Enamel:


a. Wood Primer: One coat A-100 Latex Wood Primer. b. PVC Plastic Primer: One coat Multi-Purpose Primer, B51. c. Finish: Pro Industrial High Performance Acrylic gloss, B66-600 Series.

.

I. Gypsum Board, Siding: Flat Acrylic:




a. Primer: One coat Exterior Latex Wood Primer B42 W41. b. Finish: Two coats A-100 Exterior Latex Flat.

J. Concrete and Concrete Masonry Units: Semi-Gloss Acrylic:


a. Filler: One coat Prep Rite Interior/Exterior Block Filler B25 W25. b. Finish: Two coats A-100 semi-gloss, A8.

K. Gypsum Board, Cement Plaster: Satin Acrylic:


a. Primer: One coat Exterior Latex Wood Primer. b. Finish: Two coats A-100 Exterior Latex Satin.

L. Gypsum Board, Cement Plaster: Semi-Gloss Acrylic:


a. Primer: One coat Exterior Latex Wood Primer. b. Finish: Two coats A-100 Gloss, A8.

M. Concrete:

1. Sherwin-Williams: High Performance 100% Acrylic coating a. Primer – NONE Required b. Finish: Two coats Loxon Self-Cleaning Acrylic coating

2. Sherwin-Williams: Elastomeric fine texture:

a. Primer: One coat Loxon Concrete and Masonry Primer A24. b. Finish: Two coats Con-Flex XL Textured High Build Coating, A5-800 Series.

N. Previously Painted Concrete and Masonry: a. Primer – Loxon Conditioner, if necessary b. Finish: Two coats Loxon Self-Cleaning Acrylic coating

O. Previously Painted Concrete and Masonry: - 2 coat system a. Finish: Two coats Loxon Self-Cleaning Acrylic coating

3.7 SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR SURFACES - HIGH PERFORMANCE

A. Shop Primed Ferrous Metal: Gloss Urethane:




a. Primer: One coat ProCryl Universal Primer. b. Finish: Two coats WaterBased Acrolon 100.

B. Ferrous Metals: Gloss Urethane:


a. Primer: One coat Macropoxy 646 b. Finish: Two coats WaterBased Acrolon 100.

C. Galvanized Metals: Gloss Urethane:


a. Primer: One coat Macropoxy 646. b. Finish: Two coats WaterBased Acrolon 100.






SCHRADERGROUP architecture LLC INTERIOR PAINTING Philadelphia, PA 099123 - Page 1 SGA Project 16-020.3

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING ADDENDUM NO. 4

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.

2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.

3. Label each coat of each Sample.

4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. VOC content.



1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gallon of each material and color applied.

2. Coating Maintenance Manual: Upon conclusion of the project, the Contractor or paint manufacturer/supplier shall furnish a coating maintenance manual, such as Sherwin-Williams “Custodian Project Color and Product Information” report or equal. Manual shall include an Area Summary with finish schedule, Area Detail designating where each product/color/finish was used, product data pages,



Material Safety Data Sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.



A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 degrees F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 degrees F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 degrees F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products by Sherwin Williams are the basis of design and set the standard of quality required.

1. Sherwin-Williams Company (The) Basis of Design.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=544&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456815061&mf=04&&mf=04&src=wd



2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

C. Provide tints and colorants that will not add VOCs to specified products

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.

2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.

3. Wood: 15 percent.

4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry.

E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.



1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and re-prime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.

J. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.

2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.

3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.

4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

K. Previously Painted and Multi-color painted Substrates:

1. Thoroughly examine surfaces scheduled to be painted prior to commencement of work. Report in writing any condition that may affect proper application. Do not commence work until such defects have been corrected.

2. Substrates must be clean, dry, and free of loose and peeling paint and contaminants. Areas where loose paint has been removed. Sand edges smooth and clean.

3. Where materials are being applied over previously painted surfaces, prepare substrate, apply primer sample, follow manufacturer’s instructions for dry time and perform an in place adhesion test (ASTM D3359 Tape Test) to check for compatibility, adhesion and film integrity of new materials to existing painted surfaces. Report in writing, the results of the test and any condition that may affect application, appearance or performance of the paint. Surface preparation and primer application test shall be performed by a professional paint applicator and represent work to be done and materials to be used on the project.



4. Painting of surface constitutes contractor's acceptance of surface and responsibility for any paint failure.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:

a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation

covering or other paintable jacket material.

2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:

a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit.



g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material.

h. Other items as directed by Architect.

3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 SCHEDULE - INTERIOR SURFACES - LATEX

A. Total VOC content will not be increased by tints and colorants required.

B. Shop Primed Ferrous Metal: Semi-Gloss Finish:


a. Primer: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal primer. b. Finish: Two coats Pro Industrial High Performance Acrylic, semi-gloss.

C. Ferrous Metal and Galvanized Metals: Semi-Gloss Finish:


a. Primer: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal primer. b. Finish: Two coats Pro Industrial High Performance Acrylic, semi-gloss.



D. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): Semi-Gloss Finish:


a. Filler: One coat PrepRite Interior/Exterior Block Filler B25W25. b. Finish: Two coats ProMar 200 Zero VOC with anti-microbial, semi-gloss.

E. Exposed Metal Deck & Joists: Flat Acrylic:

(for Nantorium ceilings, contact Shelly Beekley at 215-806-3579 or [email protected]) 1. Sherwin-Williams:

a. Primer: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal primer. b. Finish: One coat Low VOC Waterborne DryFall, Flat.

F. Gypsum Board: Flat Finish: - Ceiling


a. Primer: One coat. ProMar 200 Zero VOC Primer. b. Finish: Two coats. ProMar Ceiling Paint.

G. Gypsum Board: Eggshell Finish: including, but not limited to Classrooms and Administrative spaces


a. Primer: One coat ProMar 200 Zero VOC Primer. b. Finish: Two coats ProMar 200 Zero VOC, Eg-Shel.

H. Gypsum Board: Pre-Catalyzed Epoxy, Eggshell Finish: including, but not limited to Corridors


a. Primer: One coat ProMar 200 Zero VOC Primer. b. Finish: Two coats ProIndustrial Pre-Catalyzed WaterBased Epoxy,Eg-shel,

K45-150 series.

I. Gypsum Board: Catalyzed Epoxy, Gloss Finish: including Toilet Rooms


a. Primer: One coat ProMar 200 Zero VOC Primer. b. Finish: Two coats ProIndustrial WaterBased Catalyzed Epoxy, B73-300

series.

J. Gypsum Board Under Vinyl Wall Covering: Latex Primer:


a. One coat: Extreme Bond Primer.

K. Wood: Semi-Gloss Finish – 100% acrylic:


a. Primer: Not required. b. Finish: Two coats Solo 100% Acrylic, semi-gloss.

L. Concrete Floors:



1. Sherwin-Williams: clear penetrating sealer

a. Primer: Not required. b. Finish: Single flood coat Loxon 7%

2. Sherwin Williams: water based pigmented epoxy a. Two coats: ArmorSeal 8100 WaterBased Epoxy

3. Sherwin Williams: Hi-wear epoxy system for auditorium floors specified in

Section 096723 Resinous Flooring.

M. Previously Painted Multi-Color substrates: Egg-shell finish


a. Primer: Extreme Bond Primer. b. Finish: Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Epoxy, Eggshell, K45-150 series

N. Previously Painted metal doors and frames: 1. Sherwin-Williams:

a. Spot Prime bare metal and rusted areas: Pro-Cryl Universal Primer b. Full Prime coat: Extreme Bond Primer. c. Finish: Pro Industrial WB Alkyd Urethane, semi-gloss



SCHRADERGROUP architecture LLC SIGNAGE Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 101400 - Page 1 SGA Project: 16-020.3

SECTION 101400 – SIGNAGE ADDENDUM NO. 4

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Interior signage:

a. Room Identification signage.

b. Restrooms signage.

c. Informational Signage.

d. Directory Signs.

e. Signage for ADA and Life Safety Code Compliance.

2. Dimensional letter signage. 3. Interior Wall Mounted graphic. 4. Exterior illuminated aluminum signage.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI 117.1 – For Buildings and Facilities

B. ASTM International (ASTM) D635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position.

C. ASTM International (ASTM) E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

D. ASTM International (ASTM) D1929 - Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of Plastics.

E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 94 - Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances.

F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

http://www.iccsafe.org/Search/Results.aspx?k=ANSI%20117.1

http://www.astm.org/Standards/D635.htm

http://www.astm.org/Standards/E84.htm

http://www.astm.org/Standards/D1929.htm

http://ulstandardsinfonet.ul.com/scopes/scopes.asp?fn=0094.html

http://ulstandardsinfonet.ul.com/scopes/scopes.asp?fn=0723.html



G. ASTM E2072-04 - (American Society for Testing and Material) and DIN 67510.

H. ASTM E2073-02 - (Standard Test Method for Photopic Luminance of Photo luminescent (Phosphorescent) Markings).

I. ADAAG – Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; US Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board.

J. National Fire Protection Association - 101 Life Safety Code


A. Provide photopolymer signage that conforms to the requirements of all regulatory agencies holding jurisdiction and the quality control of selected signage manufacturer.

B. Requirements:

1. Comply with all applicable provisions of the ADA and ANSI A117.1-2003.

2. Character Proportion: Letters and numbers on signs must have a width-to-height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1 and a stroke width-to-height ratio between 1:5 and 1:10.

3. Color Contrast: Characters and symbols must contrast with their background - either light characters on a dark background or dark characters on a light background.

4. Raised Characters or Symbols: Letters and numbers on signs must be raised 1/32 in (0.8 mm) minimum and be sans serif characters. Raised characters or symbols must be at least 5/8 in (16 mm) high, but no higher than 2 in (50 mm). Symbols or pictograms on signs must be raised 1/32 in (0.8 mm) minimum.

5. Symbols of Accessibility: Accessible facilities required to be identified must use the international symbol of accessibility.

6. Braille: Grade II with accompanying text.

C. Fire Performance Characteristics:

1. Provide photopolymer signage with surface burning characteristics that consist of a flame spread of 75 and a smoke development of 120 when tested in accordance to UL 723 (ASTM E 84).

2. Self Extinguishing: Provide photopolymer signage with a CC1 classification for .060-inch thick material when tested in accordance with the procedures in ASTM D 635, Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning Plastics in a Horizontal Position.

3. Vertical Burn: Provide photopolymer material that is classified as 94V-2 for material .118 inches thick or greater and 94HB for material .118 inches thick

http://www.astm.org/DATABASE.CART/HISTORICAL/E2072-04.htm

http://www.astm.org/DATABASE.CART/HISTORICAL/E2073-02.htm



or less when tested in accordance with UL 94, Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances.

4. Self-Ignition Temperature: Provide photopolymer material that has a self-ignition temperature of 800 F (427C) when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1929.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Division 01.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings: Detail drawings showing materials, lay-out, sizes, lettering and graphics, construction details of each type of sign and mounting details with appropriate fasteners for specific project substrates.

D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two sets of color sheets representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

E. Verification Samples: For each sign type and color specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, patterns, overall quality, and adherence to drawings and references indicated.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Printed installation instructions for each signage system.

G. Message List: Signage report indicating signage location, text and sign type.

H. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Deliver materials in unopened factory packaging.

B. Inspect materials at delivery to verify there are no defects or damage.

C. Store products in manufacturer's original packaging until ready for installation, in climate controlled location away from direct sunlight.

D. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.




A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.


B. Install interior products in a climate-controlled environment.

C. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Interior signage:

1. At project closeout, provide to the Owner or Owner’s representative a copy of the manufacturer's standard limited warranty against manufacturing defect outlining the terms, conditions and exclusions from coverage.

B. Exterior signage 1. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace

components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

a. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

1). Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. 2). Separation or delamination of sheet materials and

components.

b. Warranty Period: Five years from the date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Interior Signage Basis-of-Design Product: Signage shall be Fusion as manufactured by Takeform, 1.800.528.1398, www.takeform.net or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Inpro Corp.

2. Micheners Engraving, Inc.



B. Exterior Signage: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 1. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.

C. Provide all interior signage from one manufacturer.

D. Interior signage to match existing interior signage material, color, font type.

E. Substitutions: Bidder must obtain prior written approval from the Architect and/or Owner to bid alternates or substitutions to the specification.

2.2 INTERIOR SIGNAGE – GENERAL

A. It is the intent of these specifications to establish a sign standard for the Owner including but not limited to primary and secondary directories, wall mounted and overhead directional signs, primary room identification, restrooms, conference rooms, work station ID’s and all code compliant signage. The signage contractor shall design and submit approval drawings for all sign types relevant to the project.

B. Comply with all applicable provisions of the ADAAG and ANSI A117.1 codes that apply to the State and Local jurisdiction of the project.

C. Typography: See Drawings. Copy shall be a true, clean and accurate reproduction of typeface(s) specified. Upper and lower case and all caps as indicated in Sign Type drawings and Signage Schedule. Letter spacing to be normal and interline spacing set by manufacturer.

D. Arrows, symbols and pictograms will be provided in style, sizes, colors and spacing as indicated in drawings for each sign system.

E. Braille

1. Grade 2 Braille utilizing perfectly round, clear insertion beads.

F. Design

1. Text/Graphics Placement: As indicated on contract drawings.

2. Colors, patterns, and artwork: As indicated on contract drawings.

3. Message Background: As indicated on contract drawings.

4. Finishes are to meet current federal ADA and all state and local requirements.

2.3 INTERIOR WALL MOUNTED GRAPHIC

A. Description: Aluminum panel 1/8 inch thick with .080 aluminum returns.\



1. Graphics: Provide graphics per artwork to be developed post-bid with assistance from manufacturer.

2. 3 locations; sizes indicated in drawings.

B. Fabrication: Graphics shall be surface applied and integral with aluminum sign. Graphics shall be protected from vandalism with a clear polyurethane coating containing fade-resistant ultraviolet inhibitors.

C. Color: To match architect’s sample. Custom color selected from Matthews Acrylic Polyurethane (MAP) paint colors.

1. Paint to withstand chipping, color-fade, gloss loss. 2. Ensure durability and protection against UV.

D. Mounting: Standoffs.

E. Illumination: provide illumination behind panel.

2.4 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE

A. Cast Characters: Characters with uniform faces; square-cut, smooth, eased edges; precisely formed lines and profiles.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. ACE Sign Systems, Inc. b. APCO Graphics, Inc. c. A. R. K. Ramos Signage Systems. d. Gemini Incorporated. e. InPro Corporation. f. Nelson-Harkins Industries. g. Southwell Company (The).

B. Character Material: Sheet or plate aluminum. C. Character Height: As indicated. D. Thickness: 3/4 inches. E. Finishes: Clear anodized. F. Mounting: Concealed studs. G. Materials: Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy

and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.

H. Accessories: Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage, noncorrosive and compatible










with each material joined, and complying with the following:

1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2. For exterior exposure, furnish nonferrous-metal, stainless-steel or hot-

dip galvanized devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General:

a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless otherwise indicated.

4. Sign Mounting Fasteners: a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or

brazed to back of sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped lugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

J. Brackets: Fabricate brackets, fittings, and hardware for bracket-mounted signs to suit sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Modify manufacturer's standard brackets as required.

2.5 IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE

K. Signage System:

1. The signage shall incorporate a decorative laminate face with applied graphics including all tactile requirements in adherence to ADA specifications.

2. All signs, including workstation and room ID’s, overheads and flag mounts, directional and directories, shall have a matching appearance and constructed utilizing the same manufacturing process to assure a consistent look throughout.

L. Materials:

1. Sign face shall be 0.035” (nominal) standard grade, high pressure surface laminate. A painted sign face shall not be acceptable.

2. The sign shall incorporate balanced construction with the core sandwiched between laminates to prevent warping. Laminate on the sign face only shall not be acceptable.

3. Tactile lettering shall be precision machined, raised 1/32”, matte PETG and subsurface colored for scratch resistance.

4. Signs shall incorporate a metal accent bar. Bars shall be anodized with a brushed satin finish. Painted bars shall not be acceptable. Refer to drawings.



M. Standard Colors:

1. Face/background color shall be standard grade, high pressure laminate, all colors and finishes. Refer to drawings.

2. Standard tactile colors shall match manufacturer’s ADA standard color selection. Refer to drawings.

N. Construction:

1. The signage shall, with the exception of directories and directional, be a

uniform 8 ½” width to facilitate inserts printed on standard width paper.

2. Insert components shall have a .080 thickness non-glare acrylic window and shall be inlaid flush to sign face for a smooth, seamless appearance.

3. The signage shall include modules allowing for inserts, notice holders, occupancy sliders, marker, magnetic, and cork boards. All modules shall be flush to sign face for a smooth, seamless appearance.

4. The laminates (font and back) shall be pressure laminated and precision machined together to a 90-degree angle. Edges shall be smooth, void of chips, burrs, sharp edges and marks.

5. The signage shall utilize an acrylic sphere for Grade II Braille inserted directly into a scratch resistant, high pressure laminate sign face. Braille dots are to be pressure fit in high tolerance drilled holes.

6. Braille dots shall be half hemispherical domed and protruding a minimum 0.025”.

7. The signage shall utilize a pressure activated adhesive. The adhesive shall be nonhazardous and shall allow for flexing and deflection of the adhered components due to changes in temperature and moisture without bond failure.

8. All signs shall be provided with appropriate mounting hardware. Hardware shall be finished and architectural in appearance and suitable for the mounting surface.

9. Some signs may be installed on glass. A blank backer is required to be placed on the opposite side of the glass to cover tape and adhesive. The backer shall match the sign in size and shape and color.

O. Printed Inserts:

1. The signage shall be capable of accepting paper or acetate inserts to allow

changing and updating as required. Insert components shall have a 0.080” thickness non-glare acrylic window and shall be inlayed flush to sign face for a smooth, seamless appearance.

2. The signage contractor shall provide and install all signage inserts.

3. Manufacturer shall provide a template containing layout, font, color, artwork, and trim lines to allow Owner to produce inserts on laser or ink jet printer.



The template shall be in an Acrobat or Word format (.pdf).

2.6 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE

A. System description: Illuminated fabricated aluminum panel with backlit white LED lights. 1. Use sufficient number of lights to provide uniformity in appearance. 2. Sign to be UL Listed and Labeled. 3. Power provided to point of sign by Electrical Contractor.

B. Aluminum Panel Sign: Sign constructed of brushed aluminum to dimensions indicated in drawings. 1. Sign shall be seamless and monolithic, with no visible screws,

fasteners or retainer frame. 2. Face Design: Flat. 3. End Design: Square. 4. Face Finish: Brushed aluminum. Faces shall be smooth, and free of

scratches, blemishes, or other imperfections. Custom color as selected by Architect.

5. Sign Sizes: as indicated on drawings. C. Mounting:

1. Concealed stud mount: use sufficient number of studs for secure placement. Quantity of studs based on artwork used.


3.1 SITE VISITS

A. Site Visits – 3 site visits shall be required by the sign contractor:

1. Prior to submission of bid for site assessment and evaluation.

2. Post award for the purposes of meeting with Owners and project manager.

3. Final walk-through and punchlist.

B. Programming – sign contractor shall perform all wayfinding & programming. Programming shall include location plan, message schedule, and/or plots, fire/evacuation maps and insert graphics. All programming materials shall be submitted for approval.

3.2 EXAMINATION



A. Verify that wall surface is dry and free from dirt, grease and loose paint. B. Complete all finishing operations, including painting, before beginning

installation of signage systems. C. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect

of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. E. Examine signage for defects, damage and compliance with specifications prior

to installation. Do not install damaged signage.

3.3 CODE COMPLIANCE

A. It shall be the responsibility of the successful bidder to meet any and all local, state, and federal code requirements in fabricating and installing signs.

3.4 PREPARATION

A. Verify mounting heights and locations comply with referenced standards. B. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation to remove dust, debris and loose

particles. C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for

achieving the best results for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Installation locations shall be in accordance with ADA specifications. Locate signs where indicated using mounting methods in compliance with manufacturer’s written instructions:

1. The signage contractor shall coordinate installation schedules with the

Owner and/or Construction Manager.

2. Installation shall be performed by manufacturer’s personnel trained and certified in manufacturer’s methods and procedures.

3. The signage contractor shall submit a CAD generated location plan noting the location of all signage and cross referenced to message schedule or plots for architect’s approval.

4. Installer to conduct a pre-installation survey prior to manufacturing to verify copy and sign location. Each location shall be noted using a low tack vinyl reproduction of actual sign. Full scale renderings of directories and directional shall also be provided. Any location discrepancy or message



issues shall be submitted to architect for review.

5. Signs shall be plumb, level, and at heights indicated with sign surfaces free from defects.

6. Upon completion of the work, signage contractor shall remove unused or discarded materials, containers and debris from site.

3.6 CLEANING

A. At completion of installation, clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Package to prevent damage or deterioration during shipment, handling, storage

and installation. Products should remain in original packaging until removal is necessary. Store products in a dry, indoor location.

C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before substantial completion.

3.8 SIGNAGE SCHEDULE

A. Room signs: Furnish one sign for each interior door listed on the door schedule and at all cased openings into spaces. Provide a blank room sign for the back side of any interior signage mounted on glass surface.

B. ADA Restroom Signs: Furnish one pictogram sign for each restroom. C. Provide directory/way finding signs, locations to be determined by Institution.

3.9 STANDARDS MANUAL

A. Manufacturer shall provide a comprehensive Standards Manual in both a paper and PDF format. The manual shall include all graphic standards, sign type descriptions, renderings showing color, pattern and finish, engineering drawings, location plans, plots, artwork, insert templates, mounting detail, and reorder information.






SCHRADERGROUP architecture LLC WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 102600 - Page 1 SGA Project: 16.02

SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION ADDENDUM NO. 4

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Corner Guards. 2. Protective Wallcovering.


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each wall and door protection unit.

B. Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit showing locations and extent. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall protection unit indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Corner Guards: 12 inches long. Include examples of joinery, corners, end caps, and top caps.

2. Wallcovering: 6” x 6” inch square.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Material Certificates: For each impact-resistant plastic material, from manufacturer.

C. Material Test Reports: For each impact-resistant plastic material.

D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.




A. Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit to include in maintenance manuals.

1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining optimum condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to plastic finishes and performance.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Corner-Guard Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of each type, color, and texture of units installed, but no fewer than two, 4-foot-long units.

B. Include mounting and accessory components. Replacement materials shall be from same production run as installed units.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall protection units from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of impact-resistant wall protection units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

D. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall protection units with surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another qualified testing agency.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Store impact-resistant wall protection units in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during the period plastic materials are stored.



2. Store wall-protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F.

a. Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position. b. Store wallcovering sheets in a horizontal position.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall protection units until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F for not less than 72 hours before beginning installation and for the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, and other construction contiguous with impact-resistant wall-protection units by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of wall and door protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures. b. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. PVC Plastic: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout; thickness as indicated.

1. Impact Resistance: Minimum 25.4 ft-lbf/in. of notch when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A.

2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 543. 3. Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635. 4. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 5. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.



B. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, but with not less than strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221 for Alloy 6063-T5.

C. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened.

2.2 CORNER GUARDS

A. Surface-Mounted, Resilient, Plastic Corner Guards: Assembly consisting of snap-on plastic cover installed over continuous retainer; including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90-degree turn to match wall condition.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Koroseal Wall Protection Systems; a division of RJF International Corporation; Koroguard G100 Series or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Balco, Inc. b. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems; Division of InPro Corporation. c. Pawling Corporation. d. Construction Specialties, Inc.

2. Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.078-inch wall thickness; in dimensions and profiles as follows.

a. Profile: Nominal 2-inch-long leg and 1/4-inch corner radius. b. Height: 5 feet. c. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Retainer: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick, one-piece, extruded aluminum. 4. Top and Bottom Caps: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color matching

cover; field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.

2.3 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALLCOVERINGS

A. Aluminum Diamond Plate Wallcovering: Fabricated from aluminum sheet goods

1. Basis-of-Design Product subject to compliance with requirements, provide Diamond Life MaxTile F1 by ‘diamondLife’ or approved equal as evaluated by Architect.

2. Size: 48 by 48 & 24 by 48 inch sheets (cut to wainscoting height as shown on drawings)

3. Sheet Thickness: 0.045 inch. 4. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 5. Height: As indicated on drawings. 6. Trim and Joint Moldings: Aluminum end & corner trim that matches sheet wall

covering color & finish. 7. Mounting: Adhesive as recommended by manufacturer







2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate wall protection units to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.

B. Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.

C. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Examine walls to which wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall sprotection system components.

B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions, in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.

1. Install Corner Guards at all outside gypsum board wall corners.

B. Impact-Resistant Wallcovering: Provide top and edge moldings, corners, and divider bars as required for a complete installation.

3.4 CLEANING



A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent.



SCHRADERGROUP architecture LLC METAL STORAGE SHELVING Philadelphia, PA 105613 - Page 1 SGA Project 16-020.3

SECTION 105613 - METAL STORAGE SHELVING ADDENDUM NO. 4

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Post-and-beam metal storage shelving.

2. Wire shelving.

B. Measurement and Payment:

1. Post-and-Shelf Metal Storage Shelving. Based on add-on metal storage shelving unit, 36 inches wide by 18 and 24 inches deep by 84 inches high, with 4 intermediate shelves.

2. Wire shelving. Based on standard shelving units, 36 inches wide by 14 inches deep by 74 inches high with 4 shelves.

3. No payment will be made for rejected metal storage shelving units, including defective units or units damaged handling or installation.


1. Structural Performance for End-Panel-Support and Post-and-Shelf Metal Storage Shelving: Provide metal storage shelving capable of withstanding the loads indicated when tested according to MH 28.1, "Specification for the Design, Testing, Utilization and Application of Industrial Grade Steel Shelving."

2. Structural Performance for Post-and-Beam Metal Storage Shelving: Provide metal storage shelving capable of withstanding the loads indicated when tested according to MH 28.2, "Specification for the Design and Testing of Metal--Wood Shelving."

3. Seismic Performance: Provide metal storage shelving capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7, ''Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for metal storage shelving.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal storage shelving, including upright-to-shelf/arm connections, lateral bracing, and attachments to other work. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and relationship to other work.

1. Calculations: Include structural analysis data for shelving units, including capacities of shelving sections, compression members (posts), and shelf connectors; signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following components, of size indicated below.

1. Posts: 12 inches (305 mm) long.

2. Shelves: Full size, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) wide by 12 inches (305 mm) deep.

3. Shelf-to-Post Connectors: Full size.

4. Shelf Labels: Full size.

E. Product Schedule: For metal storage shelving. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer.

G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of metal storage shelving.

H. Maintenance Data: For metal storage shelving to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain metal storage shelving through one source from a single manufacturer.



D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of metal storage shelving and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

1. Do not modify intended structural performance and aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS Dl .3, "Structural Welding Code- Sheet Steel."

F. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Deliver metal storage shelving palleted, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install metal storage shelving until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is completed and dry, and ambient temperature is being maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate locations and installation of metal storage shelving that may interfere with ceiling systems including lighting, HVAC, and sprinklers.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Shelves: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but no fewer than 10 shelves for each type.

2. Shelf-to-Post Connectors: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but no fewer than 10 connectors.

3. Shelf Labels: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but no fewer than 10 labels.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified or others not listed as approved by Architect. 1. Interlake Mecalux

2. Republic Storage Products

3. Konstant Products, Inc.

4. Western Pacific Storage Solutions

5. North American Steel Equipment Co. Ltd.

6. Borroughs Corporation.

7. Frick-Gallagher Manufacturing Company (The).

8. Lyon Metal Products, Inc.

9. Penco Products, Inc.

10. Rousseau Metal Inc.

11. Schaefer Systems International, Inc.

12. Tennsco Corp.

13. Western Pacific Storage Systems.

14. Nexel Industries

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/ A 101 IM, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS}, Type B.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/ A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with G60 (Z 180) zinc (galvanized) or A60 (ZF 180) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating.

D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 513, Type 2.

E. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT-304.

F. Post-installed Expansion Anchors in Concrete: With capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the load imposed as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with AS1M B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC I service condition (mild).



2. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Alloy Group 1 or 4) for nuts and bolts; ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 276, Type 304 or 316, for anchors.

3. Corrosion Protection: Components fabricated from nickel-copper-alloy rods complying with ASTM B 164 for UNS No. N04400 alloy.

G. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching foot plates for shelving units, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by shelving systems, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

2.3 POST-AND-BEAM METAL STORAGE SHELVING

A. General: Factory-formed, field-assembled, freestanding, post-and-beam metal storage shelving system; designed for shelves to be supported by beams that span between and are supported by comer posts, with shelves adjustable over the entire height of shelving unit. Fabricate initial shelving unit with a post at each comer. Fabricate additional shelving units as add-on units, designed to share two comer posts with initial shelving unit. Provide fixed top and bottom shelves, adjustable intermediate shelves, and accessories indicated.

B. Posts: Fabricated from 0.0677-inch- (1.70-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel; in manufacturer's standard 1-1/2-by-1-l/2-inch (38-by-38-rmn) open-box shape; with perforations at 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) o.c. to receive shelf-to-post connectors.

1. Add-On Shelf Posts: 0.0677-inch- ( 1.70-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel, T-shaped; perforated to match ma.in posts.

2. Post Base: 0.0677-inch- ( 1.70-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel foot plate, and drilled for mechanical attachment to floor.

C. Beams: Fabricated from 0.0677-inch- (1.70-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel; in manufacturer's standard shape; with projecting tabs at each end designed to engage posts. Provide beam at each side of each shelf, with center supports as required for load-carrying capacity.

1. Provide top and bottom shelf beams with double rivets and intermediate shelf beams with single rivets.

D. Shelves: Provide beams for 4 shelves per unit.

E. Flat Metal Shelves: Fabricated from 0.0329-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, steel sheet.

1. Fabricate fronts, backs, and sides of shelves with box-formed edges, with corners lapped and welded.

F. Shelf Capacity: 600 lb (272 kg).



G. Accessories:

1. Tie Plates: 0.0677-inch- (1.70-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel, finished to match posts; designed for joining posts of adjacent shelving units.

2. Supports: back-to-back type that bolt to posts; as required for shelving unit stability.

3. Record Box Support Rails: l-l/2-by-1-1/2-inch (38-by-38-mm) metal angle, with length to match depth of shelving unit; fabricated from same material and with same finish as beams.

4. Side Panels: Shall be 24 gauge steel. Each side shall be punched with holes for bolting to posts.

5. Backs: Shall be 24 gauge steel with holes on each side for bolting to angle posts and in the middle for using a back panel clip.

H. Finish: Baked enamel.

2.4 WIRE SHELVING

A. General: Factory-formed, field-assembled, freestanding, post-and-shelf open wire shelving; designed for shelves to be supported by comer posts, with shelves adjustable over the entire height of shelving unit. Carry the approval of the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).

B. Posts: Fabricated from 0.062-inch-thick (16 gauge), cold-rolled carbon steel tubing, electric welded; in manufacturer's standard 1 inch diameter shape; with rolled grooves at 1 inch o.c. intervals to receive shelf-to-post connectors. The top of the post to have a finished plastic cap and the post bottom to have a die cast insert with adjustable leveling foot.

C. Shelves: Face ribs run front to back equally spaced on 13/16” centers and to be of 9 gauge (0.148 inch) wire. Each side of the shelf (four) consists of a corrugated, reinforcing truss of 6 gauge (0.192 inch) wire. At the front and back of this shelf, this corrugated reinforcing truss is welded at its top to the face ribs which also are welded to a ¼” rib wire running perpendicular and above the face ribs. A ¼” rib is welded to the bottom of the truss. At the ends of the shelf, the corrugated reinforcing truss is welded to two parallel ¼” wire ribs. Depending on the width and length of the shelf, there are three or five longitudinal ribs (0.192 inch wire) welded to the face ribs. At each corner of the shelf there are tapered, conical fittings made of 12 gauge (0.104 inch) cold rolled steel welded to the parallel rib supports. The fittings are designed to accommodate the vertical supports. The corrugated trusses are shaped like the letter N.

D. Finish: Silver epoxy powder coat electrostatically applied over a rust inhibiting undercoat.

2.5 FABRICATION



A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Fabricate metal storage shelving square and rigid with posts plumb and true, and shelves flat and free of dents or distortion. Fabricate connections to form a rigid structure, free of buckling and warping.

C. Form backs of shelving units up to 48 inches (1219 mm) wide from 1 piece.

D. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.

E. Form edges and comers free of sharp edges or rough areas. Fold back and crimp exposed edges of unsupported sheet metal to form a 1/2-inch- (13-mrn-) wide hem on the concealed side; ease edges of metal plate to radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1.0 mm).

F. Form metal in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Form bent-metal comers to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

G. Weld comers and seams continuously to comply with referenced AWS standard and the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

5. Weld before finishing components to greatest extent possible. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

H. Build in straps, plates, brackets, and other reinforcements as needed to support shelf loading.

I. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications to receive hardware, fasteners, and similar items.

J. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges.

K. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL



A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish all steel surfaces, components, and accessories except prefinished stainless-steel and chrome-plated surfaces.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.7 STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. l, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard 2-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Examine floors for suitable conditions where metal storage shelving will be installed.

C. Examine walls to which metal storage shelving will be attached for properly located blocking grounds, or other solid backing for attachment of support fasteners.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Vacuum finished floor over which metal storage shelving is to be installed.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install metal storage shelving level, plumb, square, rigid, and true.

1. Adjust post base bolt leveler as required to achieve level and plumb installation.

2. Anchor shelving units to floor with post-installed expansion anchors or power-actuated fasteners through foot plate. Shim foot plate as required to achieve level and plumb installation.



3. Install ribbed metal deck shelving spanning from front to back of shelving units.

4. Install seismic supports and bracing as recommended by manufacturer and authorities having jurisdiction, and as required for stability. Extend and fasten members to supporting structure.

5. Connect side-to-side and back-to-back shelving units together at corner posts with support ties.

6. Install shelves in each shelving unit at spacing indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, at equal spacing.

1. End-Panel-Support Metal Storage Shelving: Install horizontal shelf suppo1t at front and back of each shelf.

2. Post-and-Shelf Metal Storage Shelving: Install four clips, one at each post, for support of each shelf; with clips fully engaged in post perforations.

3. Post-and-Beam Metal Storage Shelving: Install beams with rivets fully engaged in post perforations.

B. Erection Tolerances: Erect metal storage shelving with a maximum tolerance from vertical of 1/2 inch (13 mm) from O to 10 feet (0 to 3 m) of height and remaining constant at a maximum of 1 inch (25 mm) for all heights taller than 10 feet (3 m).

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Verify that shelves and shelf-to-post connectors adjust easily and properly.

B. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Touch up marred finishes or replace metal storage shelving that cannot be restored to factory finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by metal storage shelving manufacturer.

D. Replace metal storage shelving that has been damaged or has deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.






SCHRADERGROUP architecture LLC Philadelphia, Pennsylvania SGA Project: 16.020.3

INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - Page 1

SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING ADDENDUM NO. 4

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 PROJECT INCLUDES

A. Interior luminaires.

B. Luminaire accessories.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 260537 - Boxes.

B. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.

C. Section 260918 - Remote Control Switching Devices: Remote controls for lighting, including remote control switching relays.

D. Section 260919 - Enclosed Contactors: Lighting contactors.

E. Section 260923 - Lighting Control Devices: Automatic controls for lighting including

occupancy sensors, outdoor motion sensors, time switches, outdoor photo controls, and daylighting controls.

F. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices: Manual wall switches and wall dimmers.

G. Section 265600 - Exterior Lighting.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and

Low Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type); 2002.

B. ANSI C82.11 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts - Supplements; Consolidated-2002.

C. IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage

(1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits; 2002 (R2008).




D. IESNA LM-63 - ANSI Approved Standard File Format for Electronic Transfer of

Photometric Data and Related Information; 2002.

E. NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006.

F. NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; National

Electrical Contractors Association; 2006.

G. NEMA 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic Fluorescent Ballasts; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.

H. NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility; National Electrical

Manufacturers Association; 2006.

I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

J. UL 935 - Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

K. UL 1029 - High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.

L. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under

other sections or by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and associated trims with mounting surfaces at installed locations.

2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork, piping,

equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system components, and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.

3. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain

direction prior to proceeding with work.




1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard

product of the manufacturer.

C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features.

1. LED emitters and drivers: Include rated life, color temperature, lumen output of

system.

D. Certificates for Dimming Drivers: Manufacturer's documentation of compatibility with dimming controls to be installed. The EC shall be responsible for providing and installing all required wiring for control of 0-10v dimming systems.

E. Field Quality Control Reports.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations

of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product including information

on replacement parts.

H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

I. Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of luminaires and

any associated remote components. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products




specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500 (commercial

lighting), NECA/IESNA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for installation.


A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturers required service conditions during and

after installation. 1.9 WARRANTY

A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide minimum five year warranty for LED drivers.

C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the

purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRE TYPES

A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.

B. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

(Addendum Number 02)

1. The following fixtures type submitted by Illuminations on 01/09/2018 are

considered approved for substitutions: A, A1, B, B1, C, C1, C2, C3, D, E, E1, F, G, H, I, I1, J, J1, K, K1, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, R1, R2, R3, S, S1, T, U, V, V1, W, W1, X, X2, Y, Y1, Z, AA, BB, CC, DD, EE, FF, GG, HH, LL, RR, SS, PL, SA, SA1, SB, SB1, SB2.The fixtures are approved pending subsequent final shop drawing submittal. The architect and engineer retain the right to not approve the fixture if the shop drawing does not meet, or exceed the performance of the




originally specified fixture.


2. The following fixtures type submitted by Penn Lighting on 01/17/2018 are considered approved for substitutions: A, A1, B, B1, C, C1, C2, C3, D, E, E1, F, G, H, I, I1, J, J1, K, K1, L, M, N, O, P, R, R1, R2, R3, S1, T, U, V, V1, W, W1, X, X2, Y, Y1, Z, AA, BB, CC, DD, FF, GG, HH, LL, RR, SS, PL, SA, SA1, SB, SB1, SB2.The fixtures are approved pending subsequent final shop drawing submittal. The architect and engineer retain the right to not approve the fixture if the shop drawing does not meet, or exceed the performance of the originally specified fixture.

The following fixture types submitted by Penn Lighting are considered approved as noted for substitutions: S – provide 48” diameter fixture, UC – provide 277V fixture, SS – provide natatorium rated fixture, TT- provide natatorium rated floodlight.

The following fixture types submitted by Penn Lighting are considered rejected: Q, EE

3. The following fixtures type submitted by Lighting Solutions on 01/15/2018

are considered approved for substitutions: A, A1, B, B1, C, C1, C2, C3, D, F, G, J, J1, K, K1, L, M, N, S1, T, U, V, V1, W1, X, X2, Y, AA, BB, DD, FF, GG, HH, LL, RR, SS, PL, SA, SA1, SB, SB1, SB2.The fixtures are approved pending subsequent final shop drawing submittal. The architect and engineer retain the right to not approve the fixture if the shop drawing does not meet, or exceed the performance of the originally specified fixture.

The following fixture types submitted by Lighting Solutions are considered approved as noted for substitutions: E1 – Provide fixture without a mirror in it, E – provide ‘E1’ with 2200lu output, H – provide correct driver, I – provide 277V driver, I1 – provide 277V driver, O – provide shower fixture, P – provide fixture with same profile as specified, R R1 R2 R3 – provide 40% up-light and 60% downlight, S – provide 277V driver, TR – provide fixture as specified, W – provide correct driver, UC – provide fixture as specified, Y1 – provide fixture as specified, Z – provide 3300lu fixture, CC – provide 2300LU fixture, LL – provide fixture as specified, SS – provide natatorium fixture as specified, TT – provide natatorium fixture as specified.

The following fixture types submitted by Lighting Solutions are considered rejected: Q, EE




2.2 LUMINAIRES

A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.

C. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for

the purpose specified and indicated.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including drivers, reflectors, lenses, housings, mounting accessories and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light.

E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,

connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system.

F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without

any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.

G. Recessed Luminaires:

1. Ceiling Compatibility: Comply with NEMA LE 4.

2. Luminaires Recessed in Insulated Ceilings: Listed and labeled as IC-rated, suitable for direct contact with insulation and combustible materials.

3. Luminaires Recessed in Sloped Ceilings: Provide suitable sloped ceiling

adapters.

H. LED Luminaires: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 8750. PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights

and are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.

D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to luminaires.




E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. 3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260537 as required for

installation of luminaires provided under this section.

B. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 500 (commercial lighting), and NECA 502 (industrial lighting).

D. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent

luminaires.

E. Suspended Ceiling Mounted Luminaires:

1. Do not use ceiling tiles to bear weight of luminaires.

2. Do not use ceiling support system to bear weight of luminaires unless ceiling support system is certified as suitable to do so.

3. Secure surface-mounted and recessed luminaires to ceiling support channels or

framing members, or to building structure.

4. Secure pendant-mounted luminaires to building structure.

5. Secure lay-in luminaires to ceiling support channels using listed safety clips at four corners.

6. See appropriate Division 9 section where suspended grid ceiling is specified for

additional requirements.

7. Provide steel cable support to structure above in opposing corners of each troffer




fixture in addition to other mounting supports and clips.

F. Recessed Luminaires:

1. Install trims tight to mounting surface with no visible light leakage.

2. Non-IC Rated Luminaires: Maintain required separation from insulation and

combustible materials according to listing.

3. Luminaires Recessed in Fire-Rated Ceilings: Install using accessories and fire stopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating.

G. Suspended Luminaires:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to bottom of luminaire.

2. Install using the suspension method indicated, with support lengths and

accessories as required for specified mounting height.

3. Provide minimum of two supports for each luminaire equal to or exceeding 4 feet in length, with no more than 4 feet between supports.

4. Install canopies tight to mounting surface.

5. Unless otherwise indicated, support pendants from swivel hangers.

H. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are

to center of luminaire.

I. Fluorescent Luminaires Controlled by Dual-Level Switching: Connect such that each switch controls the same corresponding lamps in each luminaire.

J. Install lamps in each luminaire.

K. Lamp Burn-In: Operate lamps at full output for prescribed period per manufacturer's

recommendations prior to use with any dimming controls. Replace lamps that fail prematurely due to improper lamp burn-in.


A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect each product for damage and defects.

C. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.




D. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair

or replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial

lighting), and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish.

3.7 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.

B. See Section 017900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.

C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect, and correct

deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.

D. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed. 3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.








EXTERIOR LIGHTING

265600 - Page 1

SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING ADDENDUM NO. 4

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 PROJECT INCLUDES

A. Exterior luminaires.

B. Poles and accessories.

C. Luminaire accessories.


A. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Materials and installation requirements for

concrete bases for poles.

B. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 260537 - Boxes.

D. Section 260923 - Lighting Control Devices: Automatic controls for lighting including outdoor motion sensors, time switches, and outdoor photo controls.


A. ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and

Low Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type); 2002.

B. ANSI C82.11 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts - Supplements; Consolidated-2002.

C. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code; 2007.

D. IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage

(1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits; 2002 (R2008).



EXTERIOR LIGHTING

265600 - Page 2

E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010.

F. NECA/IESNA 501 - Recommended Practice for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems;

2006.

G. NEMA 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic Fluorescent Ballasts; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.

H. NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility; National Electrical

Manufacturers Association; 2006.

I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

J. UL 935 - Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

K. UL 1029 - High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.

L. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate placement of poles and associated foundations with utilities, curbs,

sidewalks, trees, walls, fences, striping, etc. installed under other sections or by others. Coordinate elevation to obtain specified foundation height.

2. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain

direction prior to proceeding with work. 1.5 SUBMITTALS




EXTERIOR LIGHTING

265600 - Page 3

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard

product of the manufacturer.

2. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution upon request.

3. Provide structural calculations for each pole proposed for substitution.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a

standard product of the manufacturer.

D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, weight, effective projected area (EPA), and installed accessories; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features.

1. Luminaires: Include rated life and initial and mean lumen output.

2. Poles: Include information on maximum supported effective projected area (EPA)

and weight for the design wind speed.

E. Certificates for Poles and Accessories: Manufacturer's documentation that products are suitable for the luminaires to be installed and comply with designated structural design criteria.

F. Field Quality Control Reports.

1. Include test report indicating measured illumination levels.

G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations

of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product including information

on replacement parts.

I. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.



EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - Page 4

J. Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of pole foundations, luminaires, and any pull or junction boxes.


A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products

specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's

written instructions.

B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRE TYPES

A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the Drawings.

B. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.


1. The following fixtures type submitted by Illuminations on 01/09/2018 are

considered approved for substitutions: SE, WP.The fixtures are approved pending subsequent final shop drawing submittal. The architect and engineer retain the right to not approve the fixture if the shop drawing does not meet, or exceed the performance of the originally specified fixture.


The following fixture types submitted by Illuminations are considered rejected unless a lighting calculation is produced proving these fixtures are equal at time of shop drawings: SL2L, SL2S, SL3L, SL3S, SL496, SL460, SL5, SL5L, SL5S.




2. The following fixtures type submitted by Penn Lighting on 01/17/2018

are considered approved for substitutions: SE,WP. The fixtures are approved pending subsequent final shop drawing submittal. The architect and engineer retain the right to not approve the fixture if the shop drawing does not meet, or exceed the performance of the originally specified fixture.

The following fixture types submitted by Penn Lighting are considered rejected unless a lighting calculation is produced proving these fixtures are equal at time of shop drawings: SL2L, SL2S, SL3L, SL3S, SL496, SL460, SL5, SL5L, SL5S.

3. The following fixtures type submitted by Lighting Solutions on 01/15/2018 are considered approved for substitutions: SE,WP. The fixtures are approved pending subsequent final shop drawing submittal. The architect and engineer retain the right to not approve the fixture if the shop drawing does not meet, or exceed the performance of the originally specified fixture.

The following fixture types submitted by Lighting Solutions are considered rejected unless a lighting calculation is produced proving these fixtures are equal at time of shop drawings: SL2L, SL2S, SL3L, SL3S, SL496, SL460, SL5, SL5L, SL5S.

2.2 LUMINAIRES

A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.

C. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for

the purpose specified and indicated.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including LED source, drivers, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the source and distribute the light.

E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, poles, foundations, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system.

F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without

any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.

G. Provide luminaires listed and labeled as suitable for wet locations unless otherwise




indicated.

H. Recessed Luminaires:

1. Ceiling Compatibility: Comply with NEMA LE 4.

2. Luminaires Recessed in Insulated Ceilings: Listed and labeled as IC-rated, suitable for direct contact with insulation and combustible materials.

3. Luminaires Recessed in Sloped Ceilings: Provide suitable sloped ceiling

adapters. 2.3 POLES

A. All Poles:

1. Provide poles and associated support components suitable for the luminaire(s)

and associated supports and accessories to be installed.

2. Structural Design Criteria:

a. Wind Load: Include effective projected area (EPA) of luminaire(s) and associated supports and accessories to be installed.

1) Design Wind Speed: 80 miles per hour, with gust factor of 1.3.

b. Dead Load: Include weight of proposed luminaire(s) and associated supports and accessories.

c. Include structural calculations demonstrating compliance with submittals.

3. Material: Aluminum, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Shape: Square straight, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Finish: Match luminaire finish, unless otherwise indicated.

6. Mounting: Install on concrete foundation, height as indicated on the drawings, unless otherwise indicated.

7. Unless otherwise indicated, provide with the following features/accessories:

a. Anchor bolts with leveling nuts or leveling shims.

b. Anchor base cover.

B. Metal Poles: Provide ground lug, accessible from handhole or transformer base. 2.4 ACCESSORIES




A. Provide accessory plaster frames for luminaires recessed in plaster ceilings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights

and are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.

D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to luminaires.

E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260537 as required for

installation of luminaires provided under this section.

B. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general workmanship) and NECA/IESNA 501 (exterior lighting).

D. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent

luminaires.

E. Recessed Luminaires:

1. Install trims tight to mounting surface with no visible light leakage.

2. Non-IC Rated Luminaires: Maintain required separation from insulation and combustible materials according to listing.




3. Luminaires Recessed in Fire-Rated Ceilings: Install using accessories and fire

stopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating.

F. Suspended Luminaires:

1. Install using the suspension method indicated, with support lengths and accessories as required for specified mounting height.

G. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are

to center of luminaire.

H. Pole-Mounted Luminaires:

1. Maintain the following minimum clearances:

a. Comply with IEEE C2.

b. Comply with utility company requirements.

2. Foundation-Mounted Poles:

a. Provide cast-in-place concrete foundations for poles as indicated, in accordance with Section 033000.

1) Install anchor bolts plumb per template furnished by pole manufacturer.

2) Position conduits to enter pole shaft.

b. Install foundations plumb.

c. Install poles plumb, using leveling nuts or shims as required to adjust to plumb.

d. Tighten anchor bolt nuts to manufacturer's recommended torque.

e. Install non-shrink grout between pole anchor base and concrete foundation, leaving small channel for condensation drainage.

f. Install anchor base covers or anchor bolt covers as indicated.

3. Grounding: a. Bond luminaires, metal accessories, metal poles, and foundation

reinforcement to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

b. Provide supplementary ground rod electrode as specified in Section 260526 at each pole bonded to grounding system as indicated.

4. Install separate service conductors, 12 AWG copper, from each luminaire down to

hand hole for connection to branch circuit conductors.

I. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.

J. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.




K. Install lamps in each luminaire.

L. Bond luminaires, metal accessories, and metal poles to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. Provide supplementary grounding electrode at each pole.


A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect each product for damage and defects.

C. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.

D. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair

or replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.

E. Measure illumination levels to verify conformance with performance requirements. Take measurements during night sky, without moon or with heavy overcast clouds effectively obscuring moon.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as

directed by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place.

B. Luminaires with Field-Rotatable Optics: Position optics according to manufacturer's instructions to achieve lighting distribution as indicated or as directed by Architect.

C. Aim and adjust luminaires to provide illumination levels and distribution indicated on

Drawings. 3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's instructions to

remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish.

3.7 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.

B. See Section 017900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.

C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect, and correct




deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.

D. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed. 3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.

3.9 ATTACHMENTS

A. Luminaire schedule.



SCHRADERGROUP architecture LLC STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA Philadelphia, PA 271005 - Page 1 SGA Project 16-020.3

ADDENDUM NO. 4

SECTION 271005 - STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA - OUTSIDE PLANT AND INSIDE PLANT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Cabling and pathways inside building(s).

B. Cabling and pathways connecting building(s).

C. Distribution frames, cross-connection equipment, enclosures, and outlets.

D. Grounding and bonding the telecommunications distribution system.


A. Section 337119 - Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes.

B. Section 078400 - Firestopping.

C. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: grounding and bonding.

Electrical system

D. Section 260534 - Conduit.

E. Section 260536 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems.

F. Section 260537 - Boxes.

G. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices.


A. EIA-310 - Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment; Electronic Industries Association; Revision D, 1992.

B. CEA-310 - Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment; Consumer Electronics

Association; Revision E, 2005.



C. ICEA S-90-661 - Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cable for Use in General Purpose and LAN Communications Wiring Systems; Insulated Cable Engineers Association; 2002.

D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

E. TIA-455-21 - FOTP-21 - Mating Durability of Fiber Optic Interconnecting Devices; 2012.

F. TIA-492AAAB-A - Detail Specification for 50-um Core Diameter/125-um Cladding Diameter Class Ia Graded-Index Multimode Optical Fibers; 2009.

G. TIA-492CAAA - Detail Specification for Class IVa Dispersion-Unshifted Single-Mode

Optical Fibers; 1998 (R 2002).

H. TIA-526-7 - OFSTP-7 - Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant; 2002.

I. TIA-526-14 - OFSTP-14 - Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber

Cable Plant; Rev B, 2010.

J. TIA/EIA-568-C.1 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 1: General Requirements; Rev C, 2012; Addenda 1-7.

K. TIA/EIA-568-C.2 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2:

Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components; Rev C, 2012; Addenda 1-11.

L. TIA/EIA-568-C.3 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard, and Addendum 1 - Additional Transmission Performance Specifications for 50/125 um Optical Fiber Cables; Rev C, 2012; Addendum 1.

M. TIA-569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces;

2012.

N. TIA-570 - Residential Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard; 2009.

O. TIA/EIA-606 - Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure; Rev B, 2012.

P. ANSI/J-STD-607 - Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for

Telecommunications; Rev A, 2002.

Q. UL 444 - Communications Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

R. UL 497 - Standard for Protectors for Paired-Conductor Communications Circuits; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

S. UL 1863 - Standard for Communications-Circuit Accessories; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.



T. USDA RUS 345-83 - Gas Tube Surge Arrestors (PE-80); US Department of Agriculture;

1982. 1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

2. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings: Show compliance with requirements on isometric schematic diagram of

network layout, showing cable routings, telecommunication closets, rack and enclosure layouts and locations, service entrance, and grounding, prepared and approved by BICSI Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD).

D. Manufacturer Qualifications.

E. Installer Qualifications.

F. Field Test Reports.

G. Project Record Documents: Prepared and approved by BICSI Registered

Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD).

1. Record actual locations of outlet boxes and distribution frames.

2. Show as-installed color coding, pair assignment, polarization, and cross-connect layout.

3. Identify distribution frames and equipment rooms by room number on contract

drawings. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: At least 3 years’ experience manufacturing products of the

type specified.

B. Installer Qualifications: A company having at least 3 years’ experience in the installation and testing of the type of system specified, and:

1. Employing a BICSI Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD).



2. Supervisors and installers factory certified by manufacturers of products to be installed.

3. Employing experienced technicians for all work; show at least 3 years’ experience in the

installation of the type of system specified, with evidence from at least 2 projects that have been in use for at least 18 months; submit project name, address, and written certification by user.


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Keep stored products clean and dry.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Correct defective Work within a 15 period after Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Cabling and Equipment:

B. Hubbell Premise Wiring

1. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 SYSTEM DESIGN

A. Provide a complete permanent system of cabling and pathways for voice and data

communications, including cables, conduits and wire ways, pull wires, support structures, enclosures and cabinets, and outlets.

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568 and TIA/EIA-569, latest editions.

2. Provide fixed cables and pathways that comply with NFPA 70 and ANSI/J-STD-607 and

are UL listed or third party independent testing laboratory certified.

3. Provide connection devices that are rated for operation under conditions of 32 to 140 degrees F at relative humidity of 0 to 95 percent, noncondensing.



4. In this project, the term plenum is defined as return air spaces above ceilings, inside

ducts, under raised floors, and other air-handling spaces.

B. Capacity:

1. From High School to Existing Erdenheim Elementary School

a. Backbones: 12 strand Single Mode cabling.

1) (Addendum 04) Provide armored outdoor optical fiber in inner duct. Provide optical fiber backbone cabling between buildings and copper backbone cabling within buildings.

2. Horizontal Cabling

a. MDF to IDF's

1) 12 strand Single Mode, and 12 strand Multimode fiber optic, and 25 pair Copper cabling.

2) Number of outlets:

(a) Classrooms: Refer to the drawings for exact counts of ports. (b) Computer Labs: Refer to the drawings for exact count of ports. (c) Provide additional outlets where indicated on drawings.

(Addendum 04) 3. From High School to Maintenance Garage

a. Backbones: 6 stand Single mode, and 6 strand multi-mode fiber optic. 1) Provide armored outdoor optical fiber in inner duct backbone cabling

between building and copper backbone cabling within buildings.

C. Intermediate Distribution Frames (IDF): Support structures for terminating horizontal cables that extend to telecommunications outlets.

1. Locate intermediate distribution frames as indicated on the drawings.

D. Backbone Cabling: Cabling, pathways, and terminal hardware connecting intermediate

distribution frames (IDF's) with main distribution frame (MDF), wired in star topology with main distribution frame at center hub of star.

E. Cabling to Outlets: Specified horizontal cabling, wired in star topology to distribution

frame located at center hub of star; also referred to as "links".

2.3 PATHWAYS

A. Conduit: As specified in Section 260534; provide pull cords in all conduit.

B. Cable Trays: As specified in Section 260536.



C. Underground Service Entrance: Schedule 40 PVC. 2.4 COPPER CABLE AND TERMINATIONS

A. Copper Backbone Cable: TIA/EIA-568 Category 5e solid conductor unshielded twisted pair

(UTP), 24 AWG, 100 ohm; 25 pairs, or 25 pairs formed into 25-pair binder groups; covered with white thermoplastic jacket and complying with all relevant parts of and addenda to latest editions of TIA/EIA-568 and ICEA S-90-661, and UL 444. Cable shall be Mohawk #M58451 Berk-tek. Terminate copper backbone cables on Cat 6 patch panels in the network rack.

1. In plenums, provide NFPA 70 type CMP plenum-rated cable.

2. Provide cable having conductors twisted at minimum rate of two per foot; actual

length and frequency of twists at manufacturer's option.

3. Color code conductors in accordance with ICEA S-90-661.

4. Testing: Furnish factory reel tests.

B. Copper Horizontal Cable: TIA/EIA-568 Category 6, solid conductor unshielded twisted pair (UTP), 23 AWG, 100 ohm; 4 individually twisted pairs; covered with white jacket and complying with all relevant parts of and addenda to latest edition of TIA/EIA-568 and UL 444.

1. In plenums, provide NFPA 70 type CMP plenum-rated cable, Mohawk #M58801

Berk-tek.

2. Testing: Furnish factory reel tests.

C. Copper Cable Terminations: Insulation displacement connection (IDC) type using appropriate tool; use screw connections only where specifically indicated.

D. Jacks and Connectors: RJ-45, non-keyed, terminated with 110-style insulation

displacement connectors; high impact thermoplastic housing; complying with same standard as specified horizontal cable and UL 1863.

1. Performance: 500 mating cycles.

2. Voice and Data Jacks: 4-pair, pre-wired to T568A configuration, with color-coded

indications for T568B configuration.

(Addendum 04) E. RJ-45 Patch cords to be provided by E.C. at each location with color and length as follows.

1. Phones: (1) 3’ and (1) 10 orange cable



2. Printers: (1) 3’ and (1) 10 purple cable

3. Projectors/Smartboards: (1) 3’ and (1) 10 black cable

4. WAP: (4) 3’ red cables

5. Computers: (2) 10’ blue cables

6. Energy Boxes/Security Systems/Servers: (2) 10’ green cables 2.5 FIBER OPTIC CABLE AND ADAPTORS

A. Fiber Optic Backbone Cable: 12 or 24-fiber, multimode 50/125 um, complying with

TIA-492AAAB; covered with orange cable jacket and complying with relevant portions of and addenda to latest edition of TIA/EIA-568.

B. Fiber Optic Backbone Cable: 12-fiber, single mode 8/125 um, complying with

TIA-492CAAA; covered with orange cable jacket and complying with relevant portions of and addenda to latest edition of TIA/EIA-568.

C. Fiber Patch Cords shall be Hubbell #DFPCLCLCEXMM Berk-Tek, 3 meter length.

D. Fiber Enclosures shall be Hubbell #FCR2U9SP Ortronics, with FSPLCDS6 Duplex MM

Adapter Panels, #FCLC900K50GM12 SM and MM connectors.

E. Fiber Optic Adapters and Connectors: Duplex LC, push-on-push-off type, multimode adaptors with zirconia ceramic alignment sleeves; complying with relevant parts and addenda to latest edition of TIA/EIA-568 and with maximum attenuation of 0.3 dB at 1300 nm with less than 0.2 dB change after 500 mating cycles when tested in accordance with TIA-455-21.

2.6 CROSS-CONNECTION EQUIPMENT

A. Connector Blocks for Category 6 and Up Cabling: Type 110 insulation displacement

connectors; capacity sufficient for cables to be terminated plus 25 percent spare.

B. Patch Panels for Copper Cabling: Sized to fit EIA standard 19 inch wide equipment racks; 0.09 inch thick aluminum; cabling terminated on Type 110 insulation displacement connectors; printed circuit board interface. Provide Hubbell # P6E48U Ortronics with PCMBR4 Rear cable management bar.

1. Jacks: Non-keyed RJ-45, suitable for and complying with same standard as cable to

be terminated; maximum 48 ports per standard width panel.

2. Capacity: Provide ports sufficient for cables to be terminated plus 25 percent spare.

3. Labels: Factory installed laminated plastic nameplates above each port, numbered



consecutively; comply with TIA/EIA-606 using encoded identifiers.

4. Provide incoming cable strain relief and routing guides on back of panel.

5. Patch Cords: Provide one patch cord for each pair of patch panel ports. a. Patch Cords shall be Hubbell #HC6W010 Berk-Tek, ten feet in length.

C. Patch Panels for Fiber Optic Cabling: Sized to fit EIA standard 19 inch wide equipment racks; 0.09 inch thick aluminum. 1. Adaptors: As specified above under FIBER OPTIC CABLING; maximum of 24

duplex adaptors per standard panel width.

2. Labels: Factory installed laminated plastic nameplates above each port, numbered consecutively; comply with TIA/EIA-606 using encoded identifiers.

3. Provide incoming cable strain relief and routing guides on back of panel.

4. Provide rear cable management tray at least 8 inches deep with removable cover.

5. Provide dust covers for unused adaptors.

6. Patch Cords: Provide one patch cord for each pair of patch panel ports.

2.7 ENCLOSURES

A. Backboards: Interior grade plywood without voids, 3/4 inch thick; UL-labeled fire-

retardant.

1. Size: 48 inches wide by 96 inches high.

2. Do not paint over UL label.

B. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: CEA-310 standard 19 inch wide component racks.

1. Floor Mounted Racks: 16 gage steel construction with corrosion resistant finish; vertical and horizontal cable management channels, top and bottom cable troughs, and grounding lug. Provide Hubbell #HPW84RR19D Chatsworth, with HC219CE3N Horizontal Manager, and XS1010 Vertical Cable Managers.

C. Building Entrance Protector: Factory fabricated panel to connect incoming cable and

interior cable to protector modules.

1. Capacity: One protector module per pair in incoming cable.

2. Protector Modules: Type rated for the application.



a. Solid State Type: Complying with UL 497.

3. Incoming Side: Provide connector blocks of type specified.

4. Outgoing Side (to Interior): Backbone cable wired to connector blocks.

D. Outlet Boxes: For flush mounting in walls; depth as required to accommodate cable manufacturer's recommended minimum conductor bend radius.

1. Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.

2. Wall-Mounted Telephones: 4 inches high by 2 inches wide by 2-1/8 inches deep.

3. Wall Plates: Material and finish to match wiring device and wall plate finishes specified in

Section 262726, complying with system design standards and UL 514C.

4. Faceplates: High impact thermoplastic, complying with system design standards and UL 514C.

5. Labels: Comply with TIA/EIA-606 using encoded identifiers; label each jack on the face

plate as to its function with a unique numerical identifier. PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Comply with latest editions and addenda of TIA/EIA-568, TIA/EIA-569, ANSI/J-STD-607,

NFPA 70, and SYSTEM DESIGN as specified in PART 2.

B. Comply with latest editions and addenda of TIA-570, ANSI/J-STD-607, NFPA 70, and SYSTEM DESIGN as specified in PART 2.

3.2 PATHWAYS

A. Install with the following minimum clearances:

1. 48 inches from motors, generators, frequency converters, transformers, x-ray

equipment, and uninterruptible power systems.

2. 12 inches from power conduits and cables and panelboards.

3. 5 inches from fluorescent and high frequency lighting fixtures.

4. 6 inches from flues, hot water pipes, and steam pipes.



B. Conduit:

1. Do not install more than 2 (two) 90 degree bends in a single horizontal cable run.

2. Leave pull cords in place where cables are not initially installed.

3. Conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls, ceilings, and floors except where specifically indicated to be exposed.

a. Conduit may remain exposed to view in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and telecommunications rooms.

b. Treat conduit in crawl spaces and under floor slabs as if exposed to view. c. Where exposed to view, install parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and

structural members. d. Under floor slabs, locate conduit at 12 inches, minimum, below vapor retarder; seal

penetrations of vapor retarder around conduit.

C. Outlet Boxes:

1. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260537 as required for installation of telecommunications outlets provided under this section.

a. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

1) Telephone and Data Outlets: 18 inches above finished floor. 2) Telephone Outlets for Side-Reach Wall-Mounted Telephones: 54 inches above

finished floor to top of telephone. 3) Telephone Outlets for Forward-Reach Wall-Mounted Telephones: 48

inches above finished floor to top of telephone.

b. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated.

c. Provide minimum of 24 inches horizontal separation between flush mounted outlet boxes installed on opposite sides of fire rated walls.

D. Grounding and Bonding: Perform in accordance with ANSI/J-STD-607 and NFPA 70.

E. Firestopping: Seal openings around pathway penetrations through fire-rated walls,

partitions, floors, and ceilings in accordance with Section 078400. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND CABLING

A. Cabling:

1. Do not bend cable at radius less than manufacturer's recommended bend radius; for

unshielded twisted pair use bend radius of not less than 4 times cable diameter.

2. Do not over-cinch or crush cables.



3. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended cable pull tension.

4. When installing in conduit, use only lubricants approved by cable manufacturer and do not chafe or damage outer jacket.

B. Service Loops (Slack or Excess Length): Provide the following minimum extra length of

cable, looped neatly:

1. At Distribution Frames: 120 inches.

2. At Outlets - Copper: 12 inches.

3. At Outlets - Optical Fiber: 39 inches.

C. Copper Cabling:

1. Category 5e/6: Maintain cable geometry; do not untwist more than 1/2 inch from point of termination.

2. For 4-pair cables in conduit, do not exceed 25 pounds pull tension.

3. Copper Cabling Not in Conduit: Use only type CMP plenum-rated cable as

specified.

D. Fiber Optic Cabling:

1. Prepare for pulling by cutting outer jacket for 10 inches from end, leaving strength members exposed. Twist strength members together and attach to pulling eye.

2. Support vertical cable at intervals as recommended by manufacturer.

E. Floor-Mounted Racks and Enclosures: Permanently anchor to floor in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations.

F. Field-Installed Labels: Comply with TIA/EIA-606 using encoded identifiers.

1. Cables: Install color coded labels on both ends.

2. Outlets: Label each jack on its face plate as to its type and function, with a unique numerical identifier.

3. Patch Panels: Label each jack as to its type and function, with a unique numerical

identifier.

4. Patch Cords: Label with jack identifier corresponding to initial installation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL



A. Comply with inspection and testing requirements of specified installation standards.

B. Visual Inspection:

1. Inspect cable jackets for certification markings.

2. Inspect cable terminations for color coded labels of proper type.

3. Inspect outlet plates and patch panels for complete labels.

4. Inspect patch cords for complete labels.

C. Testing - Copper Cabling and Associated Equipment:

1. Test backbone cables after termination but before cross-connection.

2. Test backbone cables for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and

polarity between connectors and between conductors and shield, if cable has overall shield.

3. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks.

4. Category 5e/6 Backbone: Perform near end cross talk (NEXT) and attenuation

tests.

D. Testing - Fiber Optic Cabling:

1. Backbone: Perform optical fiber end-to-end attenuation test using an optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) and manufacturer's recommended test procedures; perform verification acceptance tests and factory reel tests.

2. Multimode Backbone: Perform tests in accordance with TIA/EIA-526-14 Method B.

E. Final Testing: After all work is complete, including installation of telecommunications

outlets, and telephone dial tone service is active, test each voice jack for dial tone.




PAGING SYSTEMS 275123.1 - 1

SECTION 275123.1 – PAGING SYSTEMS ADDENDUM NO. 4

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The Contractor shall extend, the existing paging system including wiring, loudspeakers,

amplifiers, volume controls, zone controls, programming, paging interface for connection to the phone system, etc. The intent of these specifications is to provide complete and satisfactory operating systems for the pickup, amplification and reproduction of voice and/or music. All equipment and installation material required for a complete and operational system shall be furnished whether or not listed herein or detailed on the drawings.

B. The contractor shall provide a Viking Electronics system and interconnection with the

Springfield Township School District communication system network consistent with current operating procedures.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions with

system wiring diagrams. Provide a complete listing of all major components required for a complete and fully operational system.

B. Maintenance Data: Include data in the maintenance Manual specified in Non-Technical

Specifications and Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Requirements".

C. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed instructions for maintenance of installed work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under use conditions. Submit three complete sets of operating instructions including wiring and circuit diagrams.

D. Inventory: Supply with the manuals an inventory of the equipment provided.

E. Floor plan showing all component locations.

F. Complete riser diagram indicating all wiring and speakers volume controls, zones, connections.

G. When preparing submittals and any required final programming, use a room number

schedule generated by the architect and/or the owner, which indicates the actual room numbers that will be used when the building is occupied. If the schedule is not available, revise the initial submittal, when a schedule is available, to reflect the proper room numbers.




1.3 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Supplier: The supplier must have a minimum of five years’ experience in the design and

installation of systems equal in size and type required by this project. The supplier must maintain a local service organization within a one hundred (100) mile radius of the installation with spare components and accessories.

B. The supplier must be the authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer

supplied and have full-time technicians trained and certified in the installation and service of the equipment supplied.

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code requirements of the

authority having jurisdiction, and that portion of the NEC which pertains to installation and construction of specified products.

B. FCC Compliance: Comply with U.S. Federal Communication Class B standard for

allowable radiation from equipment and wiring.

C. Institute for Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): Comply with all applicable standards for audio, video, and data networks.

D. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): - Accessibility Guidelines for buildings and

Facilities. 1.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE WARRANTY

A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the contractor,

installer, and the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace equipment which fails in material or workmanship within the specified warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the owner may have against the contractor under the contract documents.

B. Warranty of Conformance with Specifications: The contractor shall warrant that all

specified functions shall be provided even if functional omission is not discovered until the end of the warranty period. This shall warranty full function of the system even if the owner does not fully utilize the capabilities of the system initially.

C. Warranty period is one (1) year after the Date of substantial completion and useful

implementation of the system. Warranty shall include on-site service labor and loaner parts to keep the system fully operational during the warranty period. In addition to the full parts and labor warranty the central control equipment manufacturer shall provide a five (5) year equipment only warranty.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Equipment manufactured by Viking Electronics. No other manufacturers will be

considered. 2.2 PAGING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The system shall provide the following:

1. State of the art in technology for all internal open voice communications,

emergency call-in notification, life safety paging and evacuation tones, and class change tones with schedules. The system shall be easy to learn and operate. All standard system programming shall be via a user friendly Windows PC interface to allow the system administrator the ability to easily program system features.

2. Direct dialing, hands-free, and two-way communication from

administrative telephones to any location equipped with a talkback speaker.

3. Automatic gain control on intercom speech to assure constant talkback speech.

4. Distribute an emergency announcement from a telephone to all areas furnished with a loudspeaker. This emergency announcement shall have the highest priority over all system functions.

5. Distribution o f general announcements from administrative telephone. This

announcement shall be capable of all-call, group call, or multiple group calls.

6. Classroom speakers shall be hardwired assigned to one of four paging groups.

7. Locker rooms, auxiliary gymnasium, and associated athletic areas shall be assigned to one of four paging groups.

2.3 PAGING SYSTEM ASSEMBLIES

A. The system shall consist of but not limited to the following assemblies:

1. Viking ZPI-4 four zone paging interface

2. Viking 35AE ceiling mounted speakers

3. Viking 300AE weather resistant paging horn




4. Viking FBI-1A anti-feedback paging interface 5. Viking PA-60 power amplifier

6. Volume control with emergency override.

B. Contractor shall consult with manufacturer and provide any/all devices and appurtenances for a fully operational system with capabilities as addressed in Section 2.2.

2.3 PAGING SYSTEM WIRING

A. Contractor shall consult with manufacturer and provide all wiring for a fully operational

system.

B. All wiring shall be plenum rated or installed in an enclosed rigid conduit system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with installation instructions provided by system manufacturer. Provide type of

cables as shown on manufacturer’s plans and schedules.

B. Provide Volume controls in all new offices.

C. Provide system zone groupings as follows:

1. Classrooms.

2. Corridors.

3. Exterior speakers.

4. Gymnasium, locker rooms and Weight room

D. Install system to comply with drawings and final shop drawings in compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

E. Cable identification: shall be provided on both ends of each cable and termination with the

owner’s room number and the wiring block or device to which it is connected. Tags shall be permanent and neat.

F. Furnish and install necessary conduit, raceways, pull boxes, outlet boxes and wire to

provide a complete system or systems as herein specified. All wiring shall be tested for continuity and freedom of all grounds and short circuits.

G. Each cable run between the console and remote locations shall be one continuous cable.

H. All cable shall be as manufactured by Commscope, Belden, Essex, or West Penn as

directed by the manufacturer.




I. Paging system cable shall not share conduit with any other system.

J. The Contractor shall use the types of wire recommended by the Sound Equipment

Manufacturer (Viking Electronics). However, the size and quality shall not be less than that previously specified or indicated on the Manufacturer’s drawings. If cross talk, appreciable loss of volume or distortion occurs after installation has been completed, it shall be the mutual responsibility of the Contractor and Manufacturer to correct any such condition without cost to the Owner. The Contractor in no case shall use the type of wire which he merely assumes to be the best. This recommendation shall be from the Equipment Manufacturer.

K. Provide all power and any network data connections required for system components to provide a complete and operable system.

3.2 DEMONSTRATION

A. Programming: Review all system programming with the Owner's Representative and the

Engineer, and obtain written approval before system is put on line. Telephone service interface shall be coordinated with the Owner but paid for and performed by this Contractor.

B. Subsequent to hookups of equipment, test the entire system and demonstrate proper

functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance.

C. Documentation: Bind the test results and cable identification in a cable record book

indexed for easy reference during future maintenance operations. Turn book over to the Owner's authorized representative upon completion of commissioning.

D. Provide Demonstration of system to Owner by a trained manufacturer’s representative. E. Provide additional system adjustments and revised programming as directed by the

Owner after the demonstration to meet the Owners requirements.






VESTIBULEV100

TZ-2

WOM-1

3

TZ-1

VESTIBULEV101

2' -

0"10

' - 0

"

TZ-1

TZ-2

TZ-1

WOM-1

3

Dra

win

g Ti

tle:

Dat

e:

Sca

le:

Drawing Number:

New

Con

stru

ctio

n of

:A

rchi

tect

ure

| P

lann

ing

| P

rogr

amm

ing

161

Leve

ringt

on A

ve

Suite

105

Phi

lade

lphi

a, P

enns

ylva

nia

1

9127

T 2

15 4

82 7

440

F 2

15 4

82 7

441

ww

w.s

garc

.com

SCHRADERGROUP

Arc

hite

ctur

e, L

LC

3/3

2" =

1'-0

"

ADD

END

UM

#4

- VES

TIBU

LEW

ALK

OFF

MAT

S01

/26/

18

AD4-1

SDST

HIG

H S

CH

OO

L AD

DIT

ION

&R

ENO

VATI

ON

S - P

HAS

E III

1801

EAS

T PA

PER

MIL

L R

OAD

, ER

DEN

HEI

M, P

A19

038

SCALE: 3/32" = 1'-0"AD4-1 SCALE: 3/32" = 1'-0"

1 REVISED FINISH PLAN - VESTIBULE V100

SCALE: 3/32" = 1'-0"AD4-1 SCALE: 3/32" = 1'-0"

2 REVISED FINISH PLAN - VESTIBULE V101

REVISED PLAN FROM SHEET A901

REVISED PLAN FROM SHEET A901

30227"

30"14"

30227"

30"14"

30236"

18"14"

30227"

30"14"

30227"

30"14"

21227"

32"24"

21227"

32"24"

21227"

32"24"

140A36"

24"24"

DISHWASHER PROTEAM BY HAUSMANN TAPINGSTATION CASEWORK MODEL #A9534W/ (2) MODEL A923 OPTIONS, (1)MODEL A924 OPTION, (3) MODELA926 OPTIONS, (2) MODEL A945OPTIONS, & (5) MODEL A946OPTIONS. (OR APPROVED EQUAL)

10' - 0"

3

Dra

win

g Ti

tle:

Dat

e:

Sca

le:

Drawing Number:

New

Con

stru

ctio

n of

:A

rchi

tect

ure

| P

lann

ing

| P

rogr

amm

ing

161

Leve

ringt

on A

ve

Suite

105

Phi

lade

lphi

a, P

enns

ylva

nia

1

9127

T 2

15 4

82 7

440

F 2

15 4

82 7

441

ww

w.s

garc

.com

SCHRADERGROUP

Arc

hite

ctur

e, L

LC

1/4

" = 1

'-0"

ADD

END

UM

#4

- REV

ISED

TAPI

NG

STA

TIO

N01

/26/

18

AD4-2

SDST

HIG

H S

CH

OO

L AD

DIT

ION

&R

ENO

VATI

ON

S - P

HAS

E III

1801

EAS

T PA

PER

MIL

L R

OAD

, ER

DEN

HEI

M, P

A19

038

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"AD4-2 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"

1 REVISED ELEVATION - TRAINER'S ROOMREVISED FROM 2/A805

XE.5

K

M

N

PCW1

CW2

G4

GHGFGA

G5

G6

G7

G8

GB GE

CW10

5A511

6A511

7A523

4A522

4A406

9' - 0"

1A

9' - 0"

1C

8' - 6"

1C

12' - 0 7/8"

3A

7' - 2 5/8"

3A

9' - 0"

3A

10' - 2"

1B

18' - 6"

5A

HALL OF FAMELOBBYC101

MENS129

VESTIBULEV100

18' - 6"

5A

10' - 0"

3A

TOILET129A

2' - 0"

2' -

1 1/

4"

10' - 0"

3A1' - 0"

EQEQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ

LINE OFLINEAR WDCEILINGABOVE

LINE OF LINEAR WDCEILING ABOVE

6' - 0" 8' - 0"

1 1/2"

6' - 0"

1 1/2"

3

Dra

win

g Ti

tle:

Dat

e:

Sca

le:

Drawing Number:

New

Con

stru

ctio

n of

:A

rchi

tect

ure

| P

lann

ing

| P

rogr

amm

ing

161

Leve

ringt

on A

ve

Suite

105

Phi

lade

lphi

a, P

enns

ylva

nia

1

9127

T 2

15 4

82 7

440

F 2

15 4

82 7

441

ww

w.s

garc

.com

SCHRADERGROUP

Arc

hite

ctur

e, L

LC

1/8

" = 1

'-0"

ADD

END

UM

#4

- REV

ISED

HAL

LO

F FA

ME

LOBB

Y C

EILI

NG

01/2

6/18

AD4-3

SDST

HIG

H S

CH

OO

L AD

DIT

ION

&R

ENO

VATI

ON

S - P

HAS

E III

1801

EAS

T PA

PER

MIL

L R

OAD

, ER

DEN

HEI

M, P

A19

038

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"AD4-3 SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

1 PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - AREA AREVISED FROM SHEET A121

DN

D

C.3

C

X1 X2X0.8

E

D02

D02

D02

D02

D02

D05

D05

D02

D05

D05D05

D05

D05

D06

D03D03

D02

D05D05

D08

D05

D12TYP.

D12TYP.

EXISTING STAIR(N.I.C.)

D05D05

4' -

0"

REMOVE PARTIALEXTERIOR WALL,REFER TO PHASINGDRAWINGS.SALVAGE ALLREMOVEDMATERIALS FORRE-INSTALLATION

+/- 3

' - 0

"+/

- 6' -

0"

D

C.3

C

X1 X2

X0.8 X2.1

E

2AD4-5

EXISTING STAIR

EXISTINGCORRIDOR

M6

S4A

+/- 0' - 8 7/8"

STOR.233B

CLASSROOM233

233B

N.I.C.

/SEE 1 A809

233

M6M6

M6

S4A

PATCH & REPAIR EXISTMASONRY WALLS ASREQ'D AT NEWCONSTRUCTION, PREPFOR NEW PAINT

M65' -

0"

ALIGN

8"

3' -

4"0'

- 8"

AD4-51

+/- 6

' - 0

"+/

- 3' -

0"

Dra

win

g Ti

tle:

Dat

e:

Sca

le:

Drawing Number:

Arc

hite

ctur

e |

Pla

nnin

g |

Pro

gram

min

g16

1 Le

verin

gton

Ave

Su

ite 1

05P

hila

delp

hia,

Pen

nsyl

vani

a 1

9127

T 2

15 4

82 7

440

F 2

15 4

82 7

441

ww

w.s

garc

.com

New

Con

stru

ctio

n of

:SC

HRADERGROUP

Arc

hite

ctur

e, L

LC

1/8

" = 1

'-0"

ADD

END

UM

#4-

Con

stru

ctio

n En

tranc

e @

2nd

Flo

or -

Plan

s01

/26/

2018

AD4-4

SDST

HIG

H S

CH

OO

L AD

DIT

ION

&R

ENO

VATI

ON

S - P

HAS

E III

1801

EAS

T PA

PER

MIL

L R

OAD

, ER

DEN

HEI

M, P

A19

038

AD4-4 SCALE: E: 1 1/8" = 1 = 1''-0"

1 PARTIAL DEMOLITION PLAN - SECOND FLOORAD4-4 SCALE: E: 1 1/8" = 1 = 1''-0"

2 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOORREVISED FROM SHEET AD103 REVISED FROM SHEET A104

1' - 6" V.I.F.

V.I.F.

0' - 9 5/8"

V.I.F.

0' - 4 3/8"

V.I.F.

0' - 4"

TOOTH INSALVAGED GLAZEDBLOCK AS REQ'DTO MATCH EXIST

EXIST GLAZEDBLOCK TO REMAIN

EXIST BRICKTO REMAIN

EXIST CMU TOREMAIN (V.I.F.)

TOOTH INSALVAGED CMU ASREQ'D TO MATCHEXIST

TOOTH INSALVAGED BRICKAS REQ'D TOMATCH EXIST

EXIST BRICKTO REMAIN

TOOTH INSALVAGED BRICKAS REQ'D TOMATCH EXIST

6' -

0"

EXISTING SECONDFLOOR

11' - 6 3/4"

1' - 6" V.I.F.

V.I.F.

0' - 9 5/8"

V.I.F.

0' - 4 3/8"

V.I.F.

0' - 4"

NEW PLASTER ON CMU ASREQ'D TO MATCH EXIST

EXIST PLASTER ON CMUTO REMAIN, PATCH EXISTAS REQ'D FOR NEWCONSTRUCTION

EXIST A.C.T. CEILING &GRID TO REMAIN

CONTINUOUSFLEXIBLEFLASHING W/SSTL DRIP EDGE

GALV STL ANGLE(5 x 3 1/2 x 5/16 LLV)

5/16" PTD STL PLATEWELDED TO WT 6X20

EXIST BRICK TOREMAIN

EXIST CMU TOREMAIN (V.I.F.)

INFILL BRICK &CMU ASSEMBLYTO MATCH EXISTCOURSING, SIZE,& PATTERN

EXIST STRUCT BEAM(V.I.F.)

STL ANGLE (5x5x3/8 x 8'-0" LONG)CENTERED AT WINDOW, BUTTTIGHT TO BOTTOM OF FLOORBEAM AND BOLT TO CMU W/ (4)3/4" DIA. EPOXY ANCHORS

TOOTH IN NEWBRICK TO MATCHEXIST COURSING,SIZE & PATTERN

PROVIDE TEMP.FLASHING &SEALANT ASREQ'D DURINGTEMPORARYCONSTRUCTIONACCESS

EXIST CONC SLAB ON MTLDECK TO REMAIN

REMOVE EXIST CMU ASREQ'D FOR NEW CONCFLOOR SILL

NOTE: PATCH & REPAIREXIST FLOOR AS REQ'D

EXIST BRICK TOREMAINEXIST CMU TOREMAIN (V.I.F.)

PROVIDEVERTICAL JOINTCELLULAR WEEPVENTS @ 24" O.C.

(1) #4 CONT

#4 DOWELS, DRILL &EPOXY INTO EDGE OFSLAB, 4 LOC'S AT OPENING

ADD GROUT TOCMU FOR ANCHORS

1AD4-5

TOOTH IN SALVAGEDGLAZED BLOCK AS REQ'DTO MATCH EXIST

TOOTH IN SALVAGED CMUAS REQ'D TO MATCH EXIST

NOTE: INFILL MASONRY TOOCCUR AFTER TEMP.CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCEIS NO LONGER NEEDED.REFER TO PHASINGDOCUMENTS.

Dra

win

g Ti

tle:

Dat

e:

Sca

le:

Drawing Number:

Arc

hite

ctur

e |

Pla

nnin

g |

Pro

gram

min

g16

1 Le

verin

gton

Ave

Su

ite 1

05P

hila

delp

hia,

Pen

nsyl

vani

a 1

9127

T 2

15 4

82 7

440

F 2

15 4

82 7

441

ww

w.s

garc

.com

New

Con

stru

ctio

n of

:SC

HRADERGROUP

Arc

hite

ctur

e, L

LC

1 1

/2" =

1'-0

"

ADD

END

UM

#4

- Con

stru

ctio

n En

tranc

e @

2nd

Flo

or -

Det

ails

01/26/

2018

AD4-5

SDST

HIG

H S

CH

OO

L AD

DIT

ION

&R

ENO

VATI

ON

S - P

HAS

E III

1801

EAS

T PA

PER

MIL

L R

OAD

, ER

DEN

HEI

M, P

A19

038

AD4-5 SCALE: E: 1 1 1 1/2" = 2" = 1'-0"

10 JAMB DETAIL @ WINDOW W6AD4-5 SCALE: E: 1 1 1 1/2" = 2" = 1'-0"

11 HEAD & SILL DETAIL @ WINDOW W6ADDED TO SHEET A523ADDED TO SHEET A523

3/4" SOLID SURFACECOUNTERTOP (SSM-1)

STRUCTURAL METAL BRACKET

3/4" MDF PLYWD

VCT ON 3/4" PLYWD (VCT-2)

(2) LAYERS 1/4" PLAM-FACED-PLYWD (PLAM-3)3/4" PLYWD

1X WOOD NOSING EDGE (PNT-7)

3/4" X 3" PLAM-FACED-PLYWD(PLAM-4)

CASTER WHEEL W/LOCKINGMECHANISM

3/4" X 4" PLAM-FACED-PLYWOOD(PLAM-5)

TV STUDIO MONITOR, REFER TOSPECIFICATIONS

0' -

4"


2' -

10"

1 1/

2"

2' - 6"

4 1/2"

0' - 4"

1/2" PLAM-FACED-PLYWD(PLAM-3)


PLAM ON (2) LAYERS 1/4"PLYWD (PLAM-3)

4" COUNTERTOP OVERHANG

2 X 4 STUDS 16" O.C.

PLAM ON (2) LAYERS 1/4"PLYWD (PLAM-3)


1' -

7"

3/4" SOLID SURFACECOUNTERTOP ON 3/4" MDFPLYWOOD (SSM-1)


1 x MAPLE WOOD NOSING EDGEMONITOR

PLAM ON 3/4" PLAYWD

0' -

5"2'

- 11

1/4

"

7' - 11 1/4"

(PLAM-3)

1/2" PLAM-FACED-PLYWD SIDE PANELS(PLAM-3)

Dra

win

g Ti

tle:

Dat

e:

Sca

le:

Drawing Number:

Arc

hite

ctur

e |

Pla

nnin

g |

Pro

gram

min

g16

1 Le

verin

gton

Ave

Su

ite 1

05P

hila

delp

hia,

Pen

nsyl

vani

a

191

27T

215

482

744

0F

215

482

744

1w

ww

.sga

rc.c

om

New

Con

stru

ctio

n of

:SC

HRADERGROUP

Arc

hite

ctur

e, L

LC

3/4

" = 1

'-0"

ADD

END

UM

#4

- REV

ISED

TV

STU

DIO

DES

K D

ETAI

LS01

/25/

18

AD4-6

SDST

HIG

H S

CH

OO

L AD

DIT

ION

&R

ENO

VATI

ON

S - P

HAS

E III

1801

EAS

T PA

PER

MIL

L R

OAD

, ER

DEN

HEI

M, P

A19

038

SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"AD4-6 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"

1 TV STUDIO DESK - SECTIONSCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"AD4-6 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"

3 TV STUDIO DESK - PLAN

SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"AD4-6 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"

2 TV STUDIO DESK - ELEVATION

REVISED FROM SHEET A841 REVISED FROM SHEET A841

REVISED FROM SHEET A841

3

3

3

See

Sche

dule

See Schedule See Schedule See Schedule See ScheduleSee Schedule See Schedule See Schedule

A B C D

0' -

8"0'

- 10

"1'

- 0"

3' -

7"

0' - 8" 0' - 8"

0' -

8"3'

- 7"

0' - 8" 0' - 8"0' - 6" 0' - 8"

3' -

7"0'

- 8"

1 2

7' -

4"

7' -

0"

0' -

4"7'

- 4"

7' -

0"

0' -

2"7'

- 2"

0' - 2" See Schedule 0' - 2" 0' - 2" See Schedule 0' - 2"

See ScheduleSee Schedule

E

0' -

8"1'

- 0"

0' - 8" 0' - 8"

E1 F

See Schedule

G

0' -

5"0'

- 10

"

0' - 5" 0' - 5"

ALUMINUM DOORS,WIDE STYLEWOOD DOORS

STAINLESS STEELCOUNTER DOOR

ALUMINUM OVERHEAD COILING GRILLE

See Schedule

Caf

. Sid

e

2' -

6"Se

e Sc

hedu

le

SS TRIM TOWRAP JAMBS

See

Sche

dule

See Schedule

GLGL

GL GL

GL

GL

3

7' -

4"

7' -

0"

0' -

4"

0' - 2" See Schedule 0' - 2"

4

7' -

4"

7' -

0"

0' -

4"7'

- 4"

0' - 2" See Schedule 0' - 2"

2' - 0"

0' - 2"1' - 6"

0' - 2"

*REFER TO DOOR SCHEDULE FOR GLAZING TYPES 3

DOOR NOTES

1.) ALL GLAZING IN FIRE RATED DOORS TO BE FIREGLASS COMPLYING WITH ANSI IMPACTREQUIREMENTS.

2.) ALL CLOSERS TO HAVE CLOSING SPECS SET 90º -12º, 5 SECONDS MIN.

3.) ALL DOOR LOCKS, LATCHES, PANIC HARDWAREAND PULLS TO BET SET 34"-48" AFF.

4.) ALL DOOR OPERATING DEVICES (OTHER THANPANIC HARDWARE) TO BE LEVER OPERATED.

5.) ALL THRESHOLDS TO BE 1/2" MAX. HEIGHT,BEVELED TO 1:2 SLOPE.

6.) ALL GLASS IN DOORS AND WITHIN 24" OF A DOORTO BE SAFETY TEMPERED GLASS (T).

7.) *SEE DOOR TYPES* DIMENSION NOTED IS FROMFINISHED FLOOR TO BOTTOM OF GLAZING.

8.) ALL DOOR HARDWARE TO BE MOUNTED AMINIMUM OF 34 INCHES ABOVE FINISHED FLOORAND A MAXIMUM OF 48 INCHES ABOVE FINISHEDFLOOR.

T TEMPERED GLAZINGS SPANDREL GLAZINGL LAMINATED GLAZINGFG FIRE RATED GLAZINGSG SECURITY GLAZING

GLAZING LEGEND

3-WAY CORNERMULLION

0' -

4 1/

2"

0' - 4 1/2"

HEAD / JAMB / SILL

ALUMINUMSTOREFRONT FRAME

REFERENCE FLOORPLAN AND PARTITIONSCHEDULE FORPARTITION TYPES

WD SHIM

0' - 4"

CONT BACKER ROD &SEALANT, BOTH SIDES

J-BEAD BOTH SIDES

HEAD / JAMB / SILL

HOLLOW METAL FRAME

REFERENCE FLOORPLAN AND PARTITIONSCHEDULE FORPARTITION TYPES

DIM "A": VARIES PERTHROAT WIDTH ANDPARTITION ASSEMBLY

.

COORDINATETHROAT DIM. WITHPARTITIONASSEMBLY WIDTH(TYP)

0' -

2"

0' - 2" A 0' - 1 1/2"

HEAD:CMU WALL

HOLLOW METALFRAME

REFERENCE FLOOR PLAN ANDPARTITION SCHEDULE FORPARTITION TYPES, REFERENCESTRUCTURAL FOR LINTELSCHEDULE

GROUT FRAME SOLID

BACKER ROD ANDSEALANT AT DOORFRAME PERIMETER,TYP - BOTH SIDES

0' -

4" 0' - 5 3/4"

0' - 2" 0' - 2 1/4" 0' - 1 1/2"0' - 2" 0' - 2 1/4" 0' - 1 1/2"

0' - 5 3/4"

HOLLOW METALFRAME

PROVIDE MIN. (3) JAMBANCHORS PER SIDE

GROUT FRAME SOLID

BACKER ROD ANDSEALANT AT DOORFRAME PERIMETER,TYP - BOTH SIDES

REFERENCE FLOOR PLAN ANDPARTITION SCHEDULE FORPARTITION TYPES

JAMB:CMU WALL

25'-0" MAX BETWEEN HOIST BELTS

26'-0

", V.

I.F.

8'-0

" SO

LID

+/- 68'-0"

12'-6" MAX.12'-6" MAX.

OPEN MESH

SOLID DIVIDER

ROLLERSUPPORT &DRIVE MOTOR;REFERENCEMANUFACTURERFOR DETAILS

UNDER SIDE OFSLOPINGSTRUCTURE

RETRACTABLE DIVIDER CURTAIN

ALL SUPPLEMENTAL FRAMING REQUIRED FORINSTALLATION OF GYM DIVIDER CURTAIN SHALL BEPROVIDED BY SUPPLIER/INSTALLER PERMANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS

GYM DIVIDER CURTAIN

Architecture | Planning | Programming161 Leverington AveSuite 105Philadelphia, PA 19127t 215 482 7440p 215 482 7441www.sgarc.com

Consultants:

Professional Seal:

Owner:

Drawing Title:

Drawing Number:

DATE:

SGA PROJECT NUMBER:

ISSUED FOR:NO. DATE

Ne w

Co n

stru

ctio

n of

:

SCHRADERGROUPArchitecture, LLC

Key Plan:

AREA A

AREA B AREAC

AREA D

AREA E

AREA F

AREA G

A601

DOOR SCHEDULE

SDST

HIG

H S

CH

OO

LA D

DIT

ION

&R

E NO

VATI

ON

S - P

HAS

EIII

1801

EAS

T PA

PER

MI L

L R

OAD

,ER

DE N

HE I

M, P

A 1 9

038

DECEMBER 11, 2017

16-020.3

SCHOOL DISTRICT OFSPRINGFIELD TOWNSHIP1901 PAPER MILL ROAD,ORELAND, PA 19075

Civil:

MEP:

Structural Engineer

153 East King Street, Suite 211-212Lancaster, PA 17602

1005 W. Lehigh St.Bethlehem, PA 18018

P.O. BOX 5151NEW BRITAIN, PA 18901

Renew Design Group

Snyder Hoffman Associates, Inc.

SchraderGroup

p: 215.622.1109

p: 610.694.8020

p: 717.299.8965

DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULEDOOR FRAME GLAZING

TYPEFIRE

RATING COMMENTSTYPE WIDTH HEIGHT THICKNESS MATERIAL FINISH TYPE MATERIAL FINISH DEPTH112-1 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -112-2 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -112A C 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Hollow Metal Paint 3 Hollow Metal Paint T -112B A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Hollow Metal Paint 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -112C A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Hollow Metal Paint 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -113-1 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -113-2 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" FRP - 2 Aluminium - 0' - 5 3/4" - -114 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -114A A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Hollow Metal Paint 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -114B A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Hollow Metal Paint 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -114C-1 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" FRP - 2 Aluminium - 0' - 5 3/4" - -114C-2 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" FRP - 2 Aluminium - 0' - 5 3/4" - -115 A 6' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Hollow Metal Paint 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -116 C 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" T -117 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -118 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -119 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -120 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -120A A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -121 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -121A A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -122 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Hollow Metal Paint 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -123 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -124 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" FRP - 2 Aluminium - 0' - 5 3/4" T -125-1 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" T -125-2 F 8' - 0" 4' - 0" Aluminium Stain - Stainless Steel - - - Overhead Coiling Door126 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" FRP - 2 Aluminium - 0' - 5 3/4" T -127 A 6' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Hollow Metal Paint 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -128-1 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" T 90 MIN128-2 F 10' - 0" 4' - 0" Aluminium - - Stainless Steel - - - Overhead Coiling Door129A A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -130A A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -131 C 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 3 Hollow Metal Paint T -131A C 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 1 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 8 1/4" - -132 B 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 3 Hollow Metal Paint T -132A-1 C 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 4 Hollow Metal Paint T -132A-2 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 1 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 6 3/4" - -133-1 E1 6' - 0" 8' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Aluminium - - Aluminium - T - PROVIDE BALLISTIC FILM - REFER TO ALTERNATE LIST133-2 E1 6' - 0" 8' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Aluminium - - Aluminium - T - PROVIDE BALLISTIC FILM - REFER TO ALTERNATE LIST133-3 C 6' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" T -133A A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Hollow Metal Paint 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -133B A 6' - 0" 7' - 8" 0' - 1 3/4" Hollow Metal Paint 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -134 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Hollow Metal Paint 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -135 C 6' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" T -233 C 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 3 Hollow Metal Paint T -233A-1 C 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 1 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 8 1/4" T -233A-2 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 1 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 8 1/4" - - PROVIDE ACOUSTIC SEAL233B A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -234 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - - PROVIDE ACOUSTIC SEAL235 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -235A C 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 1 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 6 3/4" - -C100-1 G 9' - 6" 8' - 6" Stainless Steel - - Stainless Steel - - - OVERHEAD COILING GRILLEC100-2 A 6' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -C101-1 E1 7' - 0" 8' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" - - ANODIZED ALUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMC101-2 E1 7' - 0" 8' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" - - ANODIZED ALUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMC101-3 D 6' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Hollow Metal Paint 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - 90 MINC101-4 Straight Door 10' - 1" 9' - 0" 1' - 2" 90 Minute Fire

RatingACCORDIAN FIRE DOOR

C102-1 A 6' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Hollow Metal Paint 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - 90 MINC102-2 D 7' - 0" 6' - 11 1/2" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - 90 MINC102-3 D 7' - 0" 6' - 11 1/2" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - 90 MINC102-4 E1 7' - 0" 8' - 0" 0' - 2" - - ANODIZED ALUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMC200-1 C 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -C200-2 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - -G001 D 5' - 1 19/128" 10' - 11 3/4" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain Existing Paint - - NEW DOOR IN EXISTING FRAMEG002 D 3' - 1" 10' - 11 3/4" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain Existing Paint - - NEW DOOR IN EXISTING FRAMEG003 D 3' - 3" 10' - 11 3/4" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain Existing Paint - - NEW DOOR IN EXISTING FRAMEG004 D 5' - 5" 10' - 11 3/4" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain Existing Paint - - NEW DOOR IN EXISTING FRAMEG005 D 7' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Hollow Metal Paint 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - 90 MIN NEW DOOR IN EXISTING FRAMEG006 D 7' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Hollow Metal Paint 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - 90 MIN NEW DOOR IN EXISTING FRAMEM001 A 6' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Hollow Metal Paint 2 Hollow Metal Paint 0' - 5 3/4" - 90 MINTV100 C 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" Wood Stain 2 Hollow Metal Paint T -V100-1 E1 7' - 0" 8' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" - - ANODIZED ALUM CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM; PROVIDE BALLISTIC FILM -

REFER TO ALTERNATE LISTV100-2 E1 7' - 0" 8' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" - - ANODIZED ALUM CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM; PROVIDE BALLISTIC FILM -

REFER TO ALTERNATE LISTV101 E1 7' - 0" 8' - 0" 0' - 2" - - ANODIZED ALUM CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM; PROVIDE BALLISTIC FILM -

REFER TO ALTERNATE LIST

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"

DOOR AND FRAME TYPES

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A601 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"

1 TYPICAL 3-WAY CORNER MULLIONSCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A601 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"

2 SF FRAME - GYPSUM WALL (4" STUD)SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A601 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"

3 HM FRAME - GYPSUM WALLSCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A601 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"

4 HM FRAME - MASONRY HEADSCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A601 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"

5 HM FRAME - MASONRY JAMB

EXIST V.I.F. EXISTEXISTEXISTEXISTEXIST

EXISTEXISTEXISTEXISTEXIST -

12/11/20173

DESCRIPTION ISSUED FOR BID Addendum #4 01/26/2018

EXIST V.I.F.EXIST V.I.F.EXIST V.I.F.

EXIST V.I.F.EXIST V.I.F.EXIST V.I.F.EXIST V.I.F.

EXIST EXIST -

3

3

AUXILIARY GYM133

A807

1

2

A808 12

G4

GT GU GV GW GX

GY

G15

G14

G13

G12

G11

G10

3' -

4"

6' - 0"

133B

133-2 133-1

133-3

8' -

0"

7' - 6"

14' -

0"

R 6' - 0"

CENTER COURT CUSTOM LOGO.REFERENCE FINISH SPECIFICATIONS.SIZE, FONT, AND COLOR TO MATCHEXIST MAIN GYMNASIUM.MANUFACTURER TO COORDINATEWITH OWNER/ARCHITECT.

TELESCOPING BLEACHERS

ROLL DOWN DIVIDERCURTAIN ABOVE

CLP-1

19' -

0"

12' -

0"

19' -

0"

RECESSED VOLLEYBALLSLEEVE W/ COVER

42' - 0" 42' - 0"

12' - 0"

84' - 0"

18' - 10"

7' - 0" 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 3' - 0"

R 6' - 0"

13' -

9"

5' -

3"5'

- 3"

13' -

9"

15' -

0"

R 6' - 0

"

R 6' - 0"

7' - 6" 12' - 8" 12' - 0" 17' - 4" 17' - 4" 12' - 0" 12' - 8" 7' - 6"

12' - 0"

15' -

0"

R 6' - 0"

R 6' - 0

"

R 6' - 0"

R 19' - 7"

18' - 10"

CLP-1

CLP-1

CLP-2

RECESSED VOLLEYBALLSLEEVE W/ COVER

7' -

0"18

' - 0

"18

' - 0

"7'

- 0"

20' - 0"10' - 0"10' - 0"20' - 0"

15' -

0"

15' -

0"

CLP-1

CLP-1

CLP-1

CLP-1

CLP-1

CLP-1

CLP-2

CLP-2 CLP-2

CLP-3

CLP-3

CLP-3

CLP-3

CLP-3 CLP-3

CLP-1

CLP-1

CLP-1

CLP-2CLP-2

CLP-1

CLP-1

CLP-2

CLP-1

CLP-2

CLP-1

CLP-1

CLP-1

CLP-1 CLP-1

CLP-4 CLP-4

CLP-4 CLP-4

SCOREBOARDABOVE

+/- 9

' - 0

"

SEATED AREA

30' - 0"

SEATED AREA

30' - 0"

+/- 3

' - 6

"

CLP-5

CLP-3

SCORER'S TABLE

6'-0" H WALL PADS

RETRACTABLEDIVIDER CURTAIN

SCOREBOARDABOVE

6'-0" H WALL PADS

6'-0" H WALLPADS

6'-0" H WALLPADS

SIZE, FONT, AND COLOR OF TEXTGRAPHICS TO MATCH EXISTINGMAIN GYMNASIUM GRAPHICS


spartansspartans SIZE, FONT, AND COLOR OF TEXT

GRAPHICS TO MATCH EXISTINGMAIN GYMNASIUM GRAPHICS


3

3

3

3

3

AUXILIARY GYM GAME LINES

CLP-1 GAME LINE - MAIN COURT BASKETBALLCOLOR: NAVY BLUE

CLP-2 GAME LINE - SECONDARY COURT BASKETBALLCOLOR: LIGHT BROWN / TAN

CLP-3 GAME LINE - VOLLEYBALLCOLOR: GRAY

CLP-4 GAME LINE - MAIN COURT BASKETBALL BORDERCOLOR: NAVY BLUE

CLP-5 MAIN COURT LOGOCOLOR: NAVY BLUE

STN-1 FIELDCOLOR: LIGHT STAIN

STN-2 ACCENTCOLOR: DARK STAIN

PROVIDECOVERPLATEVOLLEYBALLSTANDARDFLOOR SLEEVE

WOOD ATHLETICFLOORING SYSTEM,REFERENCE FINISHSCHEDULE ANDSPECIFICATIONS

CONCRETE SLAB ONGRADE, REFERENCESTRUCTURAL DRAWINGS

CONCRETE FOOTINGPER VOLLEYBALLSLEEVEMANUFACTURER'SRECOMMENDATIONS

SEE

MAN

UF.

REC

OM

MEN

DAT

ION

S

SEE MANUF. RECOMMENDATIONS

NN

0'

2'

4'

8'

16'


Consultants:

Professional Seal:

Owner:

Drawing Title:

Drawing Number:

DATE:

SGA PROJECT NUMBER:

ISSUED FOR:NO. DATE

True Project

New

Co n

stru

ctio

n of

:


Key Plan:

AREA A

AREA B AREAC

AREA D

AREA E

AREA F

AREA G

A806

ENLARGED PLAN - GYM

SDST

HIG

H S

CH

OO

LA D

DIT

ION

&R

E NO

VATI

ON

S - P

HAS

EIII

1801

EAS

T PA

PER

MI L

L R

OAD

,ER

DE N

HE I

M, P

A 1 9

038

DECEMBER 11, 2017

16-020.3


Civil:

MEP:

Structural Engineer




Renew Design Group


SchraderGroup

p: 215.622.1109

p: 610.694.8020

p: 717.299.8965

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"A806 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"

1 ENLARGED PLAN - AUXILIARY GYM

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A806 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"

2 VOLLEYBALL SLEEVE DETAIL

12/11/20173

DESCRIPTION ISSUED FOR BID Addendum #4 01/26/2018

WALL PROTECTION:

WP-1 RIGID SHEET METALMFR: DIAMONDLIFE (www.diamondlifegear.com) OR APPROVED EQUALSERIES: METAL BY THE PIECESTYLE: ANODIZED ALUMINUM DIAMOND PLATEGRADE: 3003H22THICKNESS: .045" (17 GAUGE)COLOR: MATTE SILVER LUSTER

BASE:

B-1 RUBBER BASEMFR: JOHNSONITESIZE: 4"COLOR: 29 MOON ROCK

B-2 CERAMIC TILE BASEMFR: DALTILESERIES: VOLUME 1.0SIZE: 6" x 12"COLOR: VL71 DEGREES SILVERTRIM TYPE: COVEGROUT JOINT SIZE: 3/16"EPOXY GROUT COLOR: MAPEI 02 PEWTER

B-3 CERAMIC TILE BASEMFR: DALTILESERIES: KEYSTONES MOSAICSSIZE: 2" x 2" BUILT-UP BASECOLOR: D014 DESERT GRAYTRIM TYPE: COVEGROUT JOINT SIZE: 1/8"EPOXY GROUT COLOR: MAPEI 02 PEWTER

B-4 VENTED BASEMFR: AS NOTED BY GYM FLOOR MANUFACTURERCOLOR: BLACK

B-5 RUBBER BASEMFR: JOHNSONITESIZE: 4"COLOR: 40 BLACK

METAL LOCKERS

LOC-1 MFR: PENCOCOLOR: 822 REGAL BLUE

GROUND FACED BLOCK

GFCMU-1 MFR: FIZZANO BROS. INC.COLOR: F-515 (GRAY)

GFCMU-2 MFR: FIZZANO BROS. INC.COLOR: F-523 (WHITE)

BLEACHERS

MFR: HUSSY SEATINGCOLOR: COURTSIDE 289 DARK BLUE

DOOR STAIN

MFR: MASONITE ARCHITECTURALWOOD SPECIES: WHITE MAPLECOLOR: CARAMEL

DIVIDER CURTAIN

MFR: PSS PERFORMACE SPORTS SYSTEMSVINYL COATED FABRIC MESH COLOR: M07 GREYVINYL COATED FABRIC COLOR: C10 GREY

WALL PADDING

MFR: PORTER ATHLEICVINYL COATED FABRIC COLOR: 13 NAVY BLUE

TOILET PARTITIONS:

TP-1 MFR: SCRANTON OR APPROVED EQUALMATERIAL: HIGH DENSITY (POLYETHYLENE)STYLE: ORANGE PEELCOLOR: BLUEBERRY

WALK OFF MAT:

WOM-1 TYPE: WALK-OFF MATMFR: MATS INC.STYLE: SUPREME NOP TILECOLOR: CHARCOALSIZE: 19-11/16" X 19-11/16" X7/16"

NOTE: ALL ROOMS NOTED TO WOM-1 TO RECIEVEFINISHED

CONCRETE SLAB PRIMED TO RECIEVE NEW FINISH

SOLID SURFACE:

SSM-1 (COUNTERTOP & SILLS)MFR: CORIANCOLOR: GRAYLITE

PAINT:

PT-1 TYPICAL WALL PAINTMFR: SHERWIN WILLIAMSCOLOR: SW 7648 BIG CHILL

PT-2 ACCENT PAINT & DISPLAY CASE TRIM PAINTMFR: SHERWIN WILLIAMS COLOR: SW 9178 - IN THE NAVY

PT-3 DOOR FRAMESMFR: SHERWIN WILLIAMSCOLOR: SW 7018 - DOVETAIL

PT-4 TV STUDIOMFR: ROSCO CHROMA KEY PAINTCOLOR: 5711 CHROMA KEY GREEN

PT-5 EXPOSED METAL (COLUMNS IN HALL OF FAME LOBBY)MFR: SHERWIN WILLIAMSCOLOR: SW 70185 DOVETAIL

PT-6 WALL PAINTMFR: SHERWIN WILLIAMSCOLOR: TO MATCH EXISTING ADJACENT WALL PAINT

PT-7 TRIM PAINT FOR TV STUDIO PLATFORMMFR: SHERWIN WILLIAMSCOLOR: SW 7674 PEPPERCORN

PT-8 TV STUDIO EXPOSED CEILING & ABOVE WOOD CEILING IN MAIN LOBBY)MFR: SHERWIN WILLIAMSCOLOR: SW6258 TRICORN BLACK

PT-9 (CEILING PAINT)MFR: SHWERWIN WILLIAMSCOLOR: SW 7757 HIGH REFLECTIVE WHITE

CERAMIC WALL TILE

CWT -1 FIELD (TOILET ROOMS, LOCKER ROOMS & TRAINING ROOM)MFR: DALTILESTYLE: FABRIC ARTNUMBER: ML62COLOR: MODERN LINEAR TAUPESIZE: 12 X 24GROUT JOINT SIZE: 1/8"EPOXY GROUT COLOR: MAPEI 02 PEWTER

CWT-2 (NOT USED)

NOTE: INCLUDE FINISHED INSIDE, OUTSIDE CORNERSAND TRIM PIECES WHERE APPLICABLE

CERAMIC FLOOR TILE

FT-1 FIELDMFR: DALTILESTYLE: VOLUME 1.0COLOR: VL71 DEGREES SILVERSIZE: 6 X 6GROUT JOINT SIZE: 3/16"EPOXY GROUT COLOR: MAPEI 02 PEWTER

FT-2 FIELDMFR: DALTILESTYLE: KEYSTONESCOLOR: D014 DESERT GRAYSIZE: 2 X 2 MOSAICSEPOXY GROUT COLOR: MAPEI 02 PEWTER

ACOUSTICAL PANELS

FWC -1 ACOUSTIC WRAPPED PANEL (GYMNASIUM)MFR: AS NOTED IN SPECIFICATIONSSTYLE: GUILFORD OF MAINE, FR701SIZE: AS NOTED IN ELEVATIONSCOLOR: GUILDFORD OF MAINE; PANEL2100/FR701; COLOR: 406 SILVER NEUTRAL

FWC-2 ACOUSTIC WRAPPED PANEL (TV STUDIO)MFR: AS NOTED IN SPECIFICATIONSSTYLE: GUILFORD OF MAINE, FR701SIZE: AS NOTED IN ELEVATIONSCOLOR: GUILDFORD OF MAINE; PANEL2100/FR701; COLOR: 406 SILVER NEUTRAL

GYMNASIUM GAME LINES:

CLP-1 MAIN BASKETBALL COURTCOLOR: TO BE DETERMINED

CLP-2 BASKETBALL SIDE COURT LINESCOLOR: TO BE DETERMINED

CLP-3 VOLLEYBALLCOLOR: TO BE DETERMINED

CLP-4 MAIN BASKETBALL COURT - BORDERCOLOR:

CLP-5 CENTER COURT LOGO, END & SIDE COURT TEXTCUSTOM: 5 COLORS AND DETAILIMAGE: MATCH SIZE, COLOR, & FONT OF EXISTING MAIN GYMNASIUM FLOOR; TO BE APPROVED BY OWNER/ARCH

ALL GYMNASIUM GAMELINES, LOGO, WALL PADS, BACKSTOP COLORS,SCOREBOARD COLORS TO BE REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY OWNER/ARCH.

WOOD FLOORING

WD-1 SPORTS FLOORINGMFR: CONNOR SPORTS FLOORINGSTYLE: DURACUSHION ICOLOR: STAIN COLORS - WHITE & NATURAL

CONCRETE:

CONC-1 SEALED CONCRETE

CARPET:

CPT-1 T.V. STUDIO (ANTI-STATIC CARPET TILE)MFR: STATIC SMART OR APPROVED EQUALSTYLE: LANDMARK (MC SERIES CARPET TILE)SIZE: 24X24COLOR: NIAGARAINSTALLATION METHOD: QUARTER TURN

VINYL COMPOSITION TILE:

VCT-1 FIELDMFR: TARKETTSTYLE: EXPRESSIONSSIZE: 12 X 12COLOR: 1318 WHITE/BLACK

VCT-2 TV STUDIO MOBILE DESK/PLATFORMMFR: TARKETTSTYLE: EXPRESSIONSSIZE: 12 X 12COLOR: 1374 CHARCOAL

EPOXY TERAZZO

TZ-1 BLUE BORDERMFR: ROMAN MOSAIC AND TILE COMPANYCOLOR: WC1490-3 (BLUE)THICKNESS: 3/8"

TZ-2 GRAY FIELDMFR: ROMAN MOSAIC AND TILE COMPANYCOLOR: WC1490-1 (GRAY)THICKNESS: 3/8"

TZ-3 ACCENT (FOR LOGO)COLOR: TO BE SELECTED FROM MANUFACTURER'SSTANDARD FULL RANGE OF COLOR

TZ-4 FLEXIBLE TERRAZZO TILEMFR: FRITZTILESTYLE: NATURAL QUARRY COLLECTIONCOLOR: Q160596 TWILIGHTSIZE: 12 X 12 X 3/16

PLASTIC LAMINATE:

PLAM-1 (COUNTER TOP)MFR: WILSONARTCOLOR: STEEL MESH 4879-38

PLAM-2 (VERTICAL SURFACES & PANELED WALL IN LOBBY)MFR: WILSONARTCOLOR: MONTICELLO MAPLE 7925-383MM EDGEBAND COLOR: DOELLKEN 4894 MONTICELLO

PLAM-3 (ACCENT FOR PANELED WALL IN LOBBY & TV STUDIO DESK)MFR: WILSONARTCOLOR: INDIGO D379-60

PLAM-4 (ACCENT FOR TV STUDIO DESK)MFR: CHEMETALCOLOR: 720 BRUSHED SMOKED ALUMINUM

PLAM-5 (ACCENT FOR TV STUDIO DESK)MFR: WILSONARTCOLOR: CHARCOAL VELVET 15504-31 TRACELESS FINISH

SPORTS FLOORING:

SF-1 RUBBER SYSTEM - FIELD (WEIGHT ROOM, AUXILIARY FITNESS AREA)MFR: ECORE COMMERCIAL FLOORINGSTYLE: ECO NIGHTS - INTERLOCKING TILESNUMBER: 629COLOR: BIG BANG BLUE (FIELD COLOR)TILE SIZE: 23" x 23" x 8MM

SF-2 RUBBER SYSTEM - ACCENT (WEIGHT ROOM)MFR: ECORE COMMERCIAL FLOORINGSTYLE: ECO NIGHTS - INTERLOCKING TILESNUMBER: EL15ACOLOR: STEEL APPEALTILE SIZE: 23" x 23" x 8MM

SF-3 INDOOR TURFMFR: KEIFER USA-SPORT TURFSTYLE: ULTRA740COLOR: COBALT BLUE W/ WHITE YARD LINE MARKERSSIZE: 12' ROLL W/ 5MM PAD

CEILING TYPES:

ACT-1 (1A) ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE (OFFICES, TRAINING ROOM)MFR: ARMSTRONGSTYLE: CANYON; SQUARE LAY-IN; FINE TEXTURENUMBER: 1490COLOR: WHITESIZE: 2' x 2' x 5/8"NRC: .60, CAC: 35 LR: .80GRID: 15/16" GRID; COLOR: WHITE

ACT-2 (1B) ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE (CORRIDORS, CLASSROOMS, CAFETERIA)MFR: ARMSTRONGSTYLE: ULTIMA HIGH NRC; SQUARE LAY-IN; FINE TEXTURENUMBER: 1940COLOR: WHITESIZE: 2' x 2' x 7/8"NRC: .80, CAC: 35GRID: 15/16" GRID; COLOR: BLIZZARD WHITE

ACT-3 (1C) ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE (LOCKER ROOMS, TOILET ROOMS, KITCHEN)MFR: ARMSTRONGSTYLE: CERAMAGUARD (PERFORATED); SQUARE LAY-IN; FINE FISSUREDNUMBER: 608COLOR: WHITESIZE: 2' x 2' x 5/8"NRC: .55, CAC: 40GRID: 15/16" GRID; COLOR: WHITE

ACT-4 (2A) ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE (OFFICES, TICKETS, CONCESSIONS)MFR: ARMSTRONGSTYLE: CANYON; SQUARE LAY-IN; FINE TEXTURENUMBER: 1491COLOR: WHITESIZE: 2' x 4' x 5/8"NRC: .60, CAC: 35 LR: .80GRID: 15/16" GRID; COLOR: WHITE

ACT-5 (2B) ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE (CORRIDORS, CLASSROOMS)MFR: ARMSTRONGSTYLE: ULTIMA HIGH NRC; SQUARE LAY-IN; FINE TEXTURENUMBER: 1940COLOR: WHITESIZE: 2' x 4' x 7/8"NRC: .80, CAC: 35GRID: 15/16" GRID; COLOR: BLIZZARD WHITE POWDER-COAT FINISH

ACT-6 (2C) ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE (LOCKER ROOMS, TOILET ROOMS)MFR: ARMSTRONGSTYLE: CERAMAGUARD (PERFORATED); SQUARE LAY-IN; FINE FISSUREDNUMBER: 608COLOR: WHITESIZE: 2' x 4' x 5/8"NRC: .55, CAC: 40GRID: 15/16" GRID; COLOR: WHITE

ACT-7 ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE (KITCHEN SERVING, DISHWASHING)MFR: ARMSTRONGSTYLE: CERAMAGUARD (UNPERFORATED); SQUARE LAY-INSIZE: 2' x 4' x 5/8"COLOR: WHITE

LWD-1 (5B) WOOD PLANK CEILING (HALL OF FAME LOBBY)MFR: 9 WOODSTYLE: 2100 PANELIZED LINEARWOOD SPECIES: MIXED GRAINCOLOR: EUROPEAN BEECHSIZE/SPACING: 96" x 12" x 5/8" (5/8" X 3 1/4" WITH 3 MEMBERS PER LF)

3

3

3

3

0'

2'

4'

8'

16'

32'


Consultants:

Professional Seal:

Owner:

Drawing Title:

Drawing Number:

DATE:

SGA PROJECT NUMBER:

ISSUED FOR:NO. DESCRIPTION DATE

Ne w

Co n

stru

ctio

n of

:


Key Plan:

AREA A

AREA B AREAC

AREA D

AREA E

AREA F

AREA G

A900

FINISH SCHEDULE

SDST

HIG

H S

CH

OO

LA D

DIT

ION

&R

E NO

VATI

ON

S - P

HAS

EIII

1801

EAS

T PA

PER

MI L

L R

OAD

,ER

DE N

HE I

M, P

A 1 9

038

DECEMBER 11, 2017

16-020.3


Civil:

MEP:

Structural Engineer




Renew Design Group


SchraderGroup

p: 215.622.1109

p: 610.694.8020

p: 717.299.8965

ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE

ROOM # ROOM NAMEFLOORFINISH

BASETYPE

WALL FINISH CEILING FINISH CASEWORK FINISHCOMMENTSNORTH EAST SOUTH WEST MATERIAL FINISH COUNTERTOP CABINET

112 GIRLS LOCKER ROOM VCT-1,FT-2 B-1,B-3 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 ACT-6,GYP PNT-9 - - SEE ENLARGED 800 PLAN FOR CWT-1 LOCATIONS112A GIRLS P.E. OFFICE VCT-1 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 ACT-4 - - -112B STOR. VCT-1 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 ACT-4 - - -112C JAN. VCT-1 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 ACT-4 - - -113 GIRLS SWIM TEAM ROOM FT-2 B-3 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 ACT-6,GYP PNT-9 PLAM-1 PLAM-2 SEE ENLARGED 800 PLAN FOR CWT-1 LOCATIONS114 BOYS LOCKER ROOM VCT-1,FT-2 B-1,B-3 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 ACT-6,GYP PNT-9 - - SEE ENLARGED 800 PLAN FOR CWT-1 LOCATIONS114A STOR. VCT-1 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 EXP PNT-9114B STOR. VCT-1 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 EXP PNT-9 - -114C BOYS SWIM TEAM ROOM FT-2 B-3 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 ACT-6 - - -115 STORAGE VCT-1 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 EXP PNT-9 - -116 TEAM MEETING ROOM VCT-1 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-2 PNT-1 ACT-1,GYP PNT-9 PLAM-1 PLAM-2117 TEAM LOCKER ROOM 1 VCT-1,FT-2 B-1,B-3 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 ACT-5,GYP PNT-9 - - SEE ENLARGED 800 PLAN FOR CWT-1 LOCATIONS118 TEAM LOCKER ROOM 2 VCT-1,FT-2 B-1,B-3 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 ACT-6,GYP PNT-9 - - SEE ENLARGED 800 PLAN FOR CWT-1 LOCATIONS119 JANITOR VCT-1 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 EXP PNT-9 - -120 COACHES & REFS VCT-1 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 ACT-6,GYP PNT-9 - - SEE ENLARGED 800 PLAN FOR CWT-1 LOCATIONS120A COACHES TOILET ROOM FT-2 B-3 PNT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 GYP. PNT-9 - - SEE ENLARGED 800 PLAN FOR CWT-1 LOCATIONS121 COACHES & REFS VCT-1 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 ACT-6,GYP PNT-9 - - SEE ENLARGED 800 PLAN FOR CWT-1 LOCATIONS121A COACHES TOILET ROOM FT-2 B-3 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 ACT-4, GYP. PNT-9 - - SEE ENLARGED 800 PLAN FOR CWT-1 LOCATIONS122 STORAGE VCT-1 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 EXP PNT-9 - -123 TEAM LOCKER ROOM 3 VCT-1,FT-2 B-1,B-3 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 ACT-6,GYP PNT-9 - - SEE ENLARGED 800 PLAN FOR CWT-1 LOCATIONS124 WOMEN'S PUBLIC LOCKER ROOM FT-2 B-3 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 ACT-3,GYP PNT-9 - - SEE ENLARGED 800 PLAN FOR CWT-1 LOCATIONS125 TICKETS VCT-1 B-1 PNT-1 GFCMU-1,2,PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 ACT-4 - SSM-1 PLAM-2126 MEN'S PUBLIC LOCKER ROOM FT-2 B-3 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 PNT-1,CWT-1 ACT-3,GYP PNT-9 - - SEE ENLARGED 800 PLAN FOR CWT-1 LOCATIONS127 STORAGE CONC-1 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 EXP PNT-9 - -128 CONCESSIONS VCT-1 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 ACT-4 - SSM-1 PLAM-2129 MENS FT-1 B-2 PNT-1 CWT-1,PNT-1 PNT-1 CWT-1,PNT-1 ACT-1,GYP PNT-9 - -129A TOILET FT-1 B-2 PNT-1 CWT-1,PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 ACT-1 - - -130 WOMENS FT-1 B-2 PNT-1 CWT-1,PNT-1 PNT-1 CWT-1,PNT-1 PNT-9 - -130A TOILET FT-1 B-2 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 CWT-1,PNT-1 ACT-1 - - -131 TRAINER VCT-1,FT-2 B-3 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1,*CWT-1 ACT-1 - SSM-1 PLAM-2 *GYP. BD. WALLS WILL HAVE A WAINSCOAT MATERIAL, 4FT HIGH CT WAINSCOT WALL TILE IN WHIRLPOOL AREA ONLY

(CWT-1)131A TRAINER OFFICE VCT-1 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 ACT-4 - - -132 A.D. ASSISTANT VCT-1 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 ACT-1 - - -132A A.D. OFFICE VCT-1 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 ACT-1 - - -132B A.D. OFFICE CLOSET VCT-1 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 EXP PNT-9 - -133 AUXILIARY GYM WD-1 B-4 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 EXP,GYP PNT-9 - -133A I.D.F. CLOSET CPT-1 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 EXP PNT-9 - -133B STORAGE CONC-1 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 EXP PNT-9 - -134 JAN. CONC-1 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 EXP PNT-9 - -135 WEIGHT ROOM SF-1,2 B-5 PNT-2,WP-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 EXP PNT-9 - - GYP. WD. WALLS WILL HAVE A WAINSCOAT MATERIAL233 CLASSROOM VCT-1 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 ACT-5, GYP. PNT-9 PLAM-1 PLAM-2233A CONTROL ROOM CPT-1 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 ACT-5, GYP. PNT-9 PLAM-1 PLAM-2233B STOR. VCT-1 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 EXP PNT-9 - -234 TV STUDIO CPT-2 B-1 PNT-1 PNT-4 PNT-4 PNT-1 EXP,GYP PNT-9 PLAM-1 PLAM-2235 TEMP ASSISTANT A.D. ETR ETR ETR EXISTING TO REMAIN, U.N.O. - PATCH & REPAIR AS NEEDED FOR TEMPORARY & NEW CONSTRUCTION; PAINT ALL

WALLS WHEN ROOMS TRANSITION TO "FINAL" PHASE235A TEMP A.D. OFFICE ETR ETR ETR EXISTING TO REMAIN, U.N.O. - PATCH & REPAIR AS NEEDED FOR TEMPORARY & NEW CONSTRUCTION; PAINT ALL

WALLS WHEN ROOMS TRANSITION TO "FINAL" PHASE236 TEMP TRAINER'S ROOM ETR ETR ETR EXISTING TO REMAIN, U.N.O. - PATCH & REPAIR AS NEEDED FOR TEMPORARY & NEW CONSTRUCTION; PAINT ALL

WALLS WHEN ROOMS TRANSITION TO "FINAL" PHASE236A TEMP TRAINER STORAGE ETR ETR ETR EXISTING TO REMAIN, U.N.O. - PATCH & REPAIR AS NEEDED FOR TEMPORARY & NEW CONSTRUCTION; PAINT ALL

WALLS WHEN ROOMS TRANSITION TO "FINAL" PHASE237 AUXILIARY FITNESS AREA SF-1,3 B-5 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 EXP PNT-9 - - WAINSCOAT PROVIDED @ EXISTING GYP WD (EAST WALL)C101 HALL OF FAME LOBBY TZ-1,2,4 GFCMU-1,*

B-1GFCMU-1,2,PNT-1 GFCMU-1,2,PNT-1,

PLAM-2GFCMU-1,2,PNT-1 GFCMU-1,2,PNT-1 ACT-1,4, LWD-1 GYP. PNT-9 - - WD PANELING PROVIDED @ EXISTING EAST WALL, GROUND FACE BLOCK AS NOTED IN 'A800' SERIES DRAWINGS; *B-1

ONLY IN ALCOVE W/TZ-4; PNT-1 EXISTING BRICK WALLC102 HALL OF FAME CORRIDOR TZ-1,2 GFCMU-1 GFCMU-1,2 GFCMU-1,2 GFCMU-1,2 GFCMU-1,2 ACT-2,GYP PNT-9 - - GROUND FACED BLOCK AS NOTED ON 'A800' SERIES DRAWINGSC200 NEW CORRIDOR TZ-4 B-1 PNT-6 PNT-6 PNT-6 PNT-6 ACT-4, GYP. PNT-9 - -V100 VESTIBULE WOM-1,TZ-

1,TZ-2GFCMU-1 - GFCMU-1,2 GFCMU-1,2 GFCMU-1,2 LWD-1 - - -

V101 VESTIBULE WOM-1,TZ-1

B-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 PNT-1 EXP PNT-9 - -

3 3

3

3

3

ISSUED FOR BID 12/11/20173 Addendum #4 01/26/2018

3

3

3

NOTE:

SECOND FLOOR AREA 'D'

- EXISTING MAIN ENTRY LOBBY TO RECEIVE ACT-2(1B), GWB PNT-9- EXISTING CORRIDOR & ADJACENT ROOMS (SEE SHEET A125) TO RECEIVE ACT-1(1A)

SECOND FLOOR AREA 'F'

- EXISTING CLASSROOMS (233 THRU 241) & EXISTING TEACHERS WORKROOM TO RECIEVE NEW ACT-1 (1A)- EXISTING FREEZE LOBBY TO RECEIVE NEW ACT-2 (1B)

FIRST FLOOR AREA 'G'

- EXISTING SERVING LINE/KITCHEN & EXISTING DISHWASH TO RECEIVE ACT-7- EXISTING CAFETERIA TO RECEIVE ACT-2(1B)

3

3

³

®

³

®

Draw

ing T

itle:

Da

te

:

Sca

le

: A

S N

OT

ED

Drawing Number:

SC

HR

AD

ER

GR

OU

P A

rc

hite

ctu

re

, L

LC

Arch

ite

ctu

re

| P

la

nn

in

g | P

ro

gra

mm

in

g

16

1 L

eve

rin

gto

n A

ve

S

uite

1

05

Ph

ila

de

lp

hia

, P

en

nsylva

nia

1

91

27

T 2

15

4

82

7

44

0

F 2

15

4

82

7

44

1

ww

w.sg

arc.co

m

AD

DIT

IO

NS

&

R

EN

OV

AT

IO

NS

P

HA

SE

3

:

PC

SM

N

OT

ES

&

D

ET

AILS

01

/2

6/2

01

8

AD4-

C01

Springfield T

ow

nship H

igh S

chool

18

01

E

ast P

ap

er M

ill R

oa

d

Erd

en

he

im

, P

A 1

90

38

MATCHLINE AREA 'A'

MATCHLINE AREA 'C'

MA

TC

HL

INE

AR

EA

'A'

MA

TC

HL

INE

AR

EA

'B'

Q

Q

Q

Q

Q

B

S3

SS

SS

CP

USS

KSK

OSOS

US US

US

OS

OS

OS

SLVa

SLVb

SLVc

NX

OS

OS

OS

OS

GTD

PP

GTD

NX GTD

SL

V

OS

SL

V

CP

SL

V

aS

LV

b

PP

NX

GTD

OS

SL

V

SLV

OS

NX

NX

OS

S

CP

S3

K

S3K

OS

OS

OS OS OS

S4K

S4

K

GTDGTD

CN

GTD

OS

OS

CN

SK

SK

GTD

S

US

SK

SK

CN

CN

S S S S S S

S

S

S

S

S

SS

S

S

SK

GTD

OS

WEIGHT ROOM

135

AUXILIARY GYM

133

STORAGE

133B

A.D. OFFICE

132A

A.D. ASSISTANT

132

TRAINER

131

TRAINER OFFICE

131A

MENS

129WOMENS

130

TOILET

130A

TOILET

129A

HALL OF FAMELOBBY

C101

HALL OF FAMECORRIDOR

C102

VESTIBULE

V100

JAN.

134

A.D. OFFICECLOSET

129B

VESTIBULE

V101

DD

DD

DD

DD

DD

DD

DD

DD

DD

DD

DD

DD

DD

DD

DD

DD

DD

DD

DD

DD

PROVIDE RECESSEDLOCKABLE BOX(HOFFMAN ATC18186FOR EQUAL) WITHSWITCHES INSIDE.

E

E

E

E

a a

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

b

b

b

b

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

LPN1-16

EM1-2

EM1-2LPN1-18

M M

EE

EE

EE

EE

EE

EE

EE

EE

EE

EE

EE

EE

EE

EE

EE

EE

LPN1-19 EM1-2

JBB BB

K1

K1K1

K1

N

N

N N

N

A A

A A

A A

A

A

LPN1-20

a a

a a

b b

EM1-2

A A

A1

A1

J

J

J

J

N N

NNNN

N

N

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YY1

Y1Y1

Y1Y1 Y1

S1

S1

S1

S1

S1

S1

FF FF

EM1-4

LPN1-15

FF

FF

N

NEM1-4

WIRE THRUPHOTOCELL ONROOF

N N

WIRE THRUPHOTOCELL ONROOF

EM1-4

GG

PPN2-26

GG

GG

GG

GG

GG GG GGGG GG

PPN2-26

X

X

NX AREACONTROLLER

4

DD

DD

DD

DDb

b

b

b

4

J

4

CODED LIGHTING NOTES:

RE-USE EXISTING EMERGENCY ONLY CIRCUIT.

RE-USE EXISTING CIRCUIT.

RE-USE EXISTING NORMAL EMERGENCY CIRCUIT.

RE-USE EXISTING CIRCUITRY BETWEEN FIXTURES ANDSWITCHES IN THIS AREA UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.

PROVIDE HUBBELL WASP2 HIGH BAY OCCUPANCY SENSORCATALOG NUMBER WASPSM24VLWO. DISABLE DAYLIGHTSENSOR.

RE-USE EXISTING NORMAL EMERGENCY WIRING. REPLACEEXISTING LINE VOLTAGE PHOTOCELL ON ROOF WITH NEW. E.C.TO FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF PHOTOCELL.

CIRCUIT TO NEAREST AVAILABLE NORMAL EMERGENCYCIRCUIT.

CIRCUIT TO EXISTING SPARE IN PANEL 'FHNE' AS INDICATED.

RE-USE EXISTING CIRCUITRY BETWEEN NORMAL POWERLIGHTING FIXTURES AND SWITCHES ONLY IN THIS AREA.PROVIDE NEW CIRCUITING BETWEEN NORMAL EMERGENCYFIXTURES. PROVIDE NEW CIRCUITING BETWEEN SELECTNORMAL POWER LIGHTING FIXTURES AS INDICATED.

RE-USE EXISTING NORMAL EMERGENCY CIRCUIT. REMOVE ALLEMERGENCY ONLY CIRCUITRY.

PROVIDE NEW WIRING. CIRCUIT TO EXISTING BREAKER NEH-3THROUGH A NEW LINE VOLTAGE PHOTOCELL MOUNTED ONROOF. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT.

PROVIDE HUBBELL NXPS LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL CAT# NXP-08-2-083L WITH (8) NON-DIMMING RELAYS. PROVIDE CAT. 6NETWORK CONNECTION TO NEAREST IDF FOR BASINTEGRATION. CIRCUIT ALL NORMAL POWER NATATORIUMLIGHTING THROUGH LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL. EXTENDNEAREST RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT TO RELAY PANEL.

RECONNECT TO NEW GUH USING EXISTING CIRCUIT.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

1

N

4

GENERAL LIGHTING NOTES:

1. REFER TO DRAWING E000 FOR LEGEND AND GENERAL DRAWINGSNOTES.

2. A NUMBER NEXT TO AN OCCUPANCY SENSOR, ULTRA SONICSENSOR, OR CONTROL PACK INDICATES WHICH LOCAL CONTROLS

IT WILL BE CIRCUITED WITH. IF NO NUMBER IS INDICATED, CIRCUIT TOTHE LOCAL ROOM CONTROLS.

3. ALL PHOTOCELLS SHALL BE WIRED SUCH THAT FAILURE OF THEPHOTOCELL WILL ENERGIZE THE LIGHTING CIRCUIT.

4. WHERE BLANK SPOTS ARE LEFT IN SWITCH BACKBOXES PROVIDEBLANK PLATE.

5. CIRCUIT ALL EXIT SIGNS TO THE NEAREST AVILABLE LIFE SAFETYCIRCUIT UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.

6. CAMERAS FURNISHED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY E.C. E.C. TOPROVIDE BACKBOXES, CABLING, AND CONDUIT AS REQUIRED.COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS WITH OWNER. CAMERA VENDOR ISBILL LAWRENCE WITH CM3. PHONE:215-970-4041EMAIL:[email protected]

7. E.C. SHALL EXTEND EXISTING PA SYSTEM. COORDINATE WITHEXISTING PA SYSTEM.

8. E.C. IS RESPONSIBILE FOR PATCHING CEILING WHERE NEWDOWNLIGHTS ARE INSTALLED TO MATCH EXISTING SURFACES.INCLUDE 'GOOF' RINGS WHERE NEW FIXTURE DIAMETER IS 1"SMALLER OR LESS THAN EXISTING FIXTURE. PATCH CEILING WHERENEW FIXTURE DIAMETER IS MORE THAN 1" SMALLER THAN EXISTING.

1

4

NN

0'

2'

4'

8'

16'

32'


Consultants:

Professional Seal:

Owner:

Drawing Title:

Drawing Number:

DATE:

SGA PROJECT NUMBER:

ISSUED FOR:

NO. DESCRIPTION DATE

True Project

New

Constr

uctio

n o

f:


Key Plan:

G

B CE

D

F

A

E101

FIRST FLOOR PLAN -LIGHTING - AREA 'A'

SD

ST

HIG

H S

CH

OO

LA

DD

ITIO

N &

RE

NO

VA

TIO

NS

1801 E

AS

T P

AP

ER

MIL

L R

OA

D,

ER

DE

NH

EIM

, P

A 1

9038

12/11/2017

16-020.3


Civil:

MEP:

Structural Engineer

1860 Charter Lane, Suite 206Lancaster, PA 17601



Renew Design Group


SchraderGroup

p: 215.622.1109

p: 610.694.8020

p: 717.299.8965

1/8" = 1'-0"E101

1 FIRST FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING - AREA 'A'

ISSUED FOR BID 12/11/2017

4 Addendum #4 01/26/2018

EX.PANEL'NEA'

4

PROVIDE NEW 60A/3PBREAKER IN EX. PANEL'NEA' TO FEED NEWPANEL 'EM1'

EX. ATS #2

200/3

200/3

EX. ATS #1

TO USBC

TO USBC

EX.PANEL'NEH'

EX.PANEL'NEG'

EX.PANEL'NEB'

EX.PANEL'NED'

EX.PANEL'NEE'

EX.PANEL'NEC'

EX. SPLIT PANELS. TYPICAL FOR (3).

EX.PANEL'FNHE'

EX.PANEL'SNE'

EX.PANEL'FHEO'

EX. CONTACTOR

EX.PANEL'MGNE'

EX.PANEL'MGEO'

EX. CONTACTOR

EX.PANEL'EOA'

EX.PANEL'EOB'

EX.PANEL'EOC'

EX. CONTACTOR

NEW EMERGENCYCONTACTOR LOCATEDNEAR PANEL 'EM1'. WIRETO ATS#1 SUCH THATWHEN THE ATSTRANSFERS THECONTACT CLOSES.

PANEL'EM1A'

MLO

4

EX.TRANSFORMER

1

PANEL'EM1'

MLO

4

4

C

PANEL'EML'

50AMCB PROVIDE 15KVA TRANSFORMER 480V 3PH

PRIMARY 120/208V 4W 3PH SECONDARY.4

6

4EX.

PANEL'MGPC'

PANEL'MGPL'

50AMCB

REPLACE EXISTING 20A/3PBREAKER IN CIRCUIT 50WITH NEW 100A/3PBREAKER TO FEED NEWTRANSFORMER.

PROVIDE 30KVTRANSFORMER. 208VPRIMARY, 277/480VSECONDARY. SECONDARYCONDUCTOR LENGTHNOT TO EXCEED 10'

4

3

EX. SWITCHBOARD'USBC' 120/208V

PANEL'PPN1'

2

UTLIZE EXISTING 225A/3PBREAKERS IN 'USBC' TOFEED NEW PANELS'PPN1' AND 'PPN2'

EX.PANEL'PPLL'

EX.PANEL'PPM'

EX.PANEL'PPL'

EX.PANEL'PPY'

EX.PANEL'PPV'

EX.PANEL'PPU'

EX.PANEL'PPT'

EX.PANEL'PPJ'

EX.PANEL'PPX'

EX.PANEL'PPG'

EX.PANEL

'PPI'

EX.PANEL

'HT'

EX.PANEL'PHPA'

EX.PANEL'PPK'

PANEL'PPN2'

2

EX. SWITCHBOARD'USBF' 277/480V

EX.PANEL'LPQ'

EX.PANEL'LPD'

EX.PANEL'LPE'

EX.PANEL'LPC'

EX.PANEL

'LPJ'

PANEL'LPN1'

PANEL'BBL'

PANEL'BBP'

PROVIDE 15KVTRANSFORMER. 480VPRIMARY 120/208VSECONDARY.

5

4

60AMCB

PROVIDE (2) NEW 225A/3PBREAKER IN EX. SWBD'USBF' TO FEED NEWPANELS 'LPN1' AND 'BBL'

EX. SWITCHBOARD'USBB' 120/208V

PANEL'PPTF'

2

EX.PANEL'PPA'

EX.PANEL'PPO'

EX.PANEL'PPKK'

EX.PANEL'BRPA'

EX.PANEL'PPC'

EX.PANEL'PPB'

EX.PANEL'PPS'

EX.PANEL'PPE'

EX.PANEL'PPD'

EX. POWERCONDITIONER

#3

EX.PANEL'PPP'

EX.PANEL'PPDD'


#2

EX.PANEL'PPBB'

EX.PANEL'PPCC'

EX.PANEL'PPN'

EX.PANEL'CDP1'

EX.PANEL'CP8'

EX.PANEL'CP1'

EX.PANEL'CP2'

EX.PANEL'CP3'

EX.PANEL'PPF'

EX.PANEL'PPZ'

EX. SWITCHBOARD'USBA' 120/208V

EX.PANEL'MGPA'

EX.PANEL'MGPB'

EX.PANEL'PPEE'

EX.PANEL'PPFF'

EX.PANEL'PPGG'

EX.PANEL'PPHH'


#1

EX.PANEL'CP5'

EX.PANEL'CP7'

EX.PANEL'CP6'

EX.PANEL'PPR'

EX.PANEL'PPQ'

EX.PANEL'CP9'

EX.PANEL'DP1'

EX.PANEL

'M'

EX.PANEL

'S4'

EX.PANEL

'S3'

EX.PANEL

'S2'

EX.PANEL

'S7'

EX.PANEL

'S6'

EX.PANEL

'S5'

EX.PANEL

'S1'

EX.PANEL'CP4'

EX. SWITCHBOARD'USBE' 277/480V

EX.PANEL'LPA'

EX.PANEL'FHLA'

EX.PANEL'FHPA'

EX.PANEL'FPB'

EX.PANEL'SPA'

EX.PANEL'LPP'

EX.PANEL

'LPI'

EX.PANEL'LPB'

EX. SWITCHBOARD'USBD' 277/480V

EX.PANEL'LPM'

EX.PANEL'LPO'

EX.PANEL'LPN'

EX.PANEL'LPG'

EX.PANEL'LPL'

EX.PANEL'LPF'

EX.PANEL'LPK'

EX. 15KV MEDIUMVOLTAGE SWITCHES

PANEL'PTB'

8

1

PROVIDE NEW 225A/3PBREAKER TO FEED NEWPANEL 'PPTF'

1

11

2

4

PROVIDE NEW 100A/3PBREAKER TO FEED PANEL'PTB'

4

4

4

4

FEEDER LEGEND:

1 225A (4) 250 MCM, (1) #3 GROUND, IN 3" CONDUIT.

2 225A (4) #4/0, (1) #4 GROUND IN 3" CONDUIT.

3 100A (3) #1, (1) #8 GROUND IN 2" CONDUIT.




7 20A (4)#10, (1) #10 GROUND IN 1" CONDUIT.

8 100A (4)#1, (1) #8 GROUND IN 2" CONDUIT.4

CIRCUIT REMARKS

LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL

LPN1-8

LPN1-10

LPN1-12

LPN1-14

LPN1-14

SPARE

SITE LIGHTING

SITE LIGHTING

SITE LIGHTING

SITE LIGHTING

FLAG POLE LIGHTS

-

NOTE: PROVIDE ACUITY BRANDS BLUE BOX WITH PHOTOSENSORLOCATED ON ROOF FACING NORTH. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OFPHOTOSENSOR WITH ARCHITECT.

NN

0'

2'

4'

8'

16'

32'


Consultants:

Professional Seal:

Owner:

Drawing Title:

Drawing Number:

DATE:

SGA PROJECT NUMBER:

ISSUED FOR:


True Project

New

Constr

uctio

n o

f:


Key Plan:

E501

DETAILS - ELECTRICAL

SD

ST

HIG

H S

CH

OO

LA

DD

ITIO

N &

RE

NO

VA

TIO

NS

1801 E

AS

T P

AP

ER

MIL

L R

OA

D,

ER

DE

NH

EIM

, P

A 1

9038

12/11/2017

16-020.3


Civil:

MEP:

Structural Engineer




Renew Design Group


SchraderGroup

p: 215.622.1109

p: 610.694.8020

p: 717.299.8965

NO SCALEE501

1 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM - ELECTRICAL EM DISTRIBUTION

NO SCALEE501

2 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM - ELECTRICAL NORMAL DISTRIBUTION


1 Addendum #1 01/05/2018

2 Addendum #2 01/12/2018

4 Addendum #4 01/26/2018

NN

0'

2'

4'

8'

16'

32'


Consultants:

Professional Seal:

Owner:

Drawing Title:

Drawing Number:

DATE:

SGA PROJECT NUMBER:

ISSUED FOR:


True Project

New

Constr

uctio

n o

f:


Key Plan:

E602

SCHEDULES - ELECTRICAL

SD

ST

HIG

H S

CH

OO

LA

DD

ITIO

N &

RE

NO

VA

TIO

NS

1801 E

AS

T P

AP

ER

MIL

L R

OA

D,

ER

DE

NH

EIM

, P

A 1

9038

12/11/2017

16-020.3


Civil:

MEP:

Structural Engineer




Renew Design Group


SchraderGroup

p: 215.622.1109

p: 610.694.8020

p: 717.299.8965

Integrated Equivelant SPD by Equipment Manufacturer

Provide Leviton Cat # 32(voltage)-DY3 Surge Protection Device (SPD) with Flush Mounted Enclosure and Dedicated 30A/3p Breaker/Feed or Provide

Provide Bolt-on Breakers, Full Rated Copper Buses, Equipment Ground Bars and Isolated Ground Bar (where Required)

Notes:

Total Est. Demand... 118 A

Total Conn. Current: 118 A

Total Est. Demand: 98480 VA

Power 1080 VA 100.00% 1080 VA Total Conn. Load: 98480 VA

Other 97400 VA 100.00% 97400 VA

Load Classification Connected Load Demand Factor Estimated... Panel Totals

121 A 120 A 116 A

33353 VA 32993 VA 32133 VA

41 -- -- -- 0 / 0 -- -- -- 42

39 -- -- -- 0 / 0 -- -- -- 40

37 3 20 A Spare 0 / 0 SPD 30 A 3 38

35 -- -- -- 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 36

33 -- -- -- 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 34

31 3 30 A Spare 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 32

29 -- -- -- 3600 / 3600 -- -- -- 30

27 -- -- -- 3600 / 3600 -- -- -- 28

25 3 20 A P3 FIELD LIGHTING 3600 / 3600 P4 FIELD LIGHTING 20 A 3 26

23 -- -- -- 6167 / 3600 -- -- -- 24

21 -- -- -- 6167 / 3600 -- -- -- 22

19 3 30 A C1 FIELD LIGHTING 6167 / 3600 P2 FIELD LIGHTING 20 A 3 20

17 -- -- -- 3500 / 3333 -- -- -- 18

15 -- -- -- 3500 / 3333 -- -- -- 16

13 3 20 A B1 Field Lighting 3500 / 3333 C2 FIELD LIGHTING 20 A 3 14

11 -- -- -- 2167 / 3500 -- -- -- 12

9 -- -- -- 2167 / 3500 -- -- -- 10

7 3 20 A A1 FIELD LIGHTING 2167 / 3500 B2 Field Lighting 20 A 3 8

5 -- -- -- 500 / 2167 -- -- -- 6

3 -- -- -- 1360 / 2167 -- -- -- 4

1 3 25 A 15kV Transformer 1720 / 2167 A2 FIELD LIGHTING 20 A 3 2

CKT Poles Trip Circuit Description

Phase A(VA)

Phase B(VA)

Phase C(VA)

Circuit Description

Trip Poles

CKT

Enclosure: Type 1 MCB Rating: 225 A

Mounting: Surface Wires: 4 Mains Rating: 225 A

Supply From: Phases: 3 Mains Type: MCB

Location: Volts: 480/277 Wye A.I.C. Rating: 14000

Branch Panel: BBL




Notes:





Other 2500 VA 100.00% 2500 VA


15 A 12 A 4 A

1720 VA 1360 VA 500 VA

23 -- -- Space 0 / 0 -- -- -- 24

21 -- -- Space 0 / 0 -- -- -- 22

19 -- -- Space 0 / 0 SPD 30 A 3 20

17 -- -- Space 0 / 0 Space -- -- 18

15 -- -- Space 0 / 0 Space -- -- 16

13 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 14

11 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 12

9 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 10

7 -- -- -- 0 / 360 Rcpts - Dugout 20 A 1 8

5 2 30 A Spare 0 / 500 Field Lighting Cntrl Pnl 20 A 1 6

3 -- -- -- 1000 / 360 Rcpts - Baseball Storage 20 A 1 4

1 2 30 A Scoreboard 1000 / 360 Rcpt - Scoreboard 20 A 1 2


Phase A(VA)

Phase B(VA)

Phase C(VA)

Circuit Description

Trip Poles

CKT

Enclosure: NEMA 3R MCB Rating: 60 A


Supply From: 15KV XFMR Phases: 3 Mains Type: MCB


Branch Panel: BBP




Notes:


Power 2085 VA 100.00% 2085 VA Total Conn. Current: 8 A

Other 2441 VA 100.00% 2441 VA Total Est. Demand: 6899 VA

Motor 63 VA 100.00% 63 VA Total Conn. Load: 6899 VA

Lighting 2310 VA 100.00% 2310 VA


14 A 4 A 9 A

3673 VA 986 VA 2241 VA

41 -- -- Space 0 / 0 -- -- -- 42

39 -- -- Space 0 / 0 -- -- -- 40

37 -- -- Space 0 / 0 SPD 30 A 3 38

35 -- -- Space 0 / 0 Space -- -- 36

33 -- -- Space 0 / 0 Space -- -- 34

31 -- -- Space 0 / 0 Space -- -- 32

29 -- -- Space 0 / 0 Space -- -- 30

27 -- -- Space 0 / 0 Space -- -- 28

25 -- -- Space 0 / 0 Space -- -- 26

23 -- -- Space 0 / 0 Space -- -- 24

21 -- -- Space 0 / 0 Space -- -- 22

19 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 20

17 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 18

15 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 16

13 1 20 A Spare 0 / 953 -- -- -- 14

11 1 20 A Spare 0 / 953 -- -- -- 12

9 1 20 A Spare 0 / 180 TRANSFORMER 20 A 3 10

7 1 20 A EM Lighting 765 / 0 8

5 -- -- -- 0 / 1288 EM Lighting 20 A 1 6

3 -- -- -- 0 / 806 Lighting C101 20 A 1 4

1 3 60 A Spare 0 / 1955 EM Lighting 126, 128 20 A 1 2


Phase A(VA)

Phase B(VA)

Phase C(VA)

Circuit Description

Trip Poles

CKT

Enclosure: Type 1 MCB Rating:


Supply From: Phases: 3 Mains Type: MLO

Location: EXISTING SWITCH... Volts: 480/277 Wye A.I.C. Rating: 14000

Branch Panel: EM1




Notes:




Other 68455 VA 100.00% 68455 VA Total Conn. Load: 75413 VA

Lighting 6958 VA 100.00% 6958 VA


86 A 94 A 95 A

23745 VA 25777 VA 25891 VA

41 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 -- -- -- 42

39 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 -- -- -- 40

37 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 SPD 30 A 3 38

35 -- -- -- 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 36

33 -- -- -- 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 34

31 3 45 A Spare 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 32

29 -- -- -- 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 30

27 -- -- -- 0 / 0 -- -- -- 28

25 3 30 A Spare 0 / 0 -- -- -- 26

23 1 20 A Lightin - 101-106 1490 / 0 Spare 20 A 3 24

21 1 20 A Lighting - Ex. Corridor 1133 / 1540 Lighting - 107-114 20 A 1 22

19 1 20 A Lighting - 128 915 / 669 Lighting - 121-124 20 A 1 20

17 1 20 A Lighting - 112-117 1015 / 3180 Lighting - 126 20 A 1 18

15 1 20 A Lighting - C101 1256 / 1642 Lighting - 126 20 A 1 16

13 1 20 A FPV 11-1,2 1955 / 0 Site Lighting 20 A 1 14

11 -- -- -- 5761 / 0 Site Lighting 20 A 1 12

9 -- -- -- 5761 / 0 Site Lighting 20 A 1 10

7 3 30 A RTU-12 5761 / 0 Site Lighting 20 A 1 8

5 -- -- -- 9778 / 4667 -- -- -- 6

3 -- -- -- 9778 / 4667 -- -- -- 4

1 3 45 A RTU-13 9778 / 4667 RTU-11 20 A 3 2


Phase A(VA)

Phase B(VA)

Phase C(VA)

Circuit Description

Trip Poles

CKT



Supply From: Phases: 3 Mains Type: MCB


Branch Panel: LPN1




Notes:




Total Conn. Load: 32600 VA

Power 32600 VA 100.00% 32600 VA


107 A 114 A 63 A

12100 VA 13000 VA 7500 VA

53 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 -- -- -- 54

51 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 -- -- -- 52

49 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 SPD 30 A 3 50

47 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 48

45 1 20 A Spare 0 / 180 Rcpts - 126 20 A 1 46

43 1 20 A Spare 0 / 180 Rcpts - 124 20 A 1 44

41 1 20 A Spare 0 / 180 Rcpts - 118 20 A 1 42

39 1 20 A Refrigerator 131 1500 / 180 Rcpts - 118 20 A 1 40

37 1 20 A Rcpts - C102 900 / 180 Rcpts - 123 20 A 1 38

35 1 20 A Digital Signs - C102 360 / 180 Rcpts - 123 20 A 1 36

33 -- -- -- 2500 / 360 Rcpts - 118 20 A 1 34

31 2 30 A Range - 112 2500 / 1500 Hood/Microwave - 112 20 A 1 32

29 -- -- -- 0 / 1080 Rcpts - Roof 20 A 1 30

27 2 30 A Spare 0 / 600 EWC - C102 20 A 1 28

25 1 20 A Rcpts - 131A 720 / 360 Rcpts - 123 20 A 1 26

23 1 20 A Rcpts - 131 720 / 540 Rcpts - 131 20 A 1 24

21 1 20 A Rcpts - 126B 360 / 1500 Ice Maker 131 20 A 1 22

19 1 20 A Rcpts - 129 720 / 720 Rcpts - 129A 20 A 1 20

17 1 20 A EWC - C102 600 / 720 Rcpts - 130/129 20 A 1 18

15 1 20 A Rcpts - 124,126 720 / 1440 Rcpts - C101/C102 20 A 1 16

13 1 20 A Rcpts - 114/115 720 / 1080 Rcpts - 119 20 A 1 14

11 1 20 A Microwave 114 1500 / 540 Rcpts - 114 20 A 1 12

9 1 20 A Rcpts - C103 720 / 1500 Refrigerator 114 20 A 1 10

7 1 20 A Rcpts - 118, 120 720 / 720 Rcpts -121,123 20 A 1 8

5 1 20 A Rcpts - 116 360 / 720 Rcpts - C100 20 A 1 6

3 1 20 A Rcpts - 116 540 / 900 Rcpts - 116 20 A 1 4

1 1 20 A Rcpts - 112 540 / 540 Rcpts - 115 20 A 1 2


A B C

Circuit Description

Trip Poles

CKT





Branch Panel: PPN1




Notes:


Power 8445 VA 100.00% 8445 VA Total Conn. Current: 93 A

Other 24736 VA 100.00% 24736 VA Total Est. Demand: 33381 VA

Motor 0 VA 0.00% 0 VA Total Conn. Load: 33381 VA

Lighting 200 VA 100.00% 200 VA


102 A 77 A 106 A

11833 VA 9247 VA 12301 VA

53 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 -- -- -- 54

51 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 -- -- -- 52

49 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 SPD 30 A 3 50

47 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 48

45 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 46

43 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 44

41 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 42

39 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 40

37 1 20 A Divider Curtain - Aux. Gym 1500 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 38

35 1 20 A Roller Curtain -133 1500 / 0 Aux. Gym Blower 20 A 1 36

33 1 20 A Roller Curtain - 133 1500 / 0 Aux. Gym Blower 20 A 1 34

31 1 20 A Power 1500 / 800 Aux. Gym Blower 20 A 1 32

29 1 20 A Roller Shades - 135 1500 / 0 -- -- -- 30

27 1 20 A Overhead Coiling Grille 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 2 28

25 1 20 A Clock GPS 180 / 200 Display Case Lighting 15 A 1 26

23 -- -- -- 780 / 1067 EF-2,3 20 A 1 24

21 2 15 A CU-1 780 / 1587 EF-1 25 A 1 22

19 1 20 A Aux. Gym Curtain 1600 / 800 CH-1 thru 4 15 A 1 20

17 1 25 A Aux. Gym Backstop 1587 / 1587 Aux. Gym Backstop 25 A 1 18

15 1 25 A Aux. Gym Backstop 1587 / 1587 Aux. Gym Backstop 25 A 1 16

13 1 25 A Aux. Gym Backstop 1587 / 533 -- -- -- 14

11 1 25 A Aux. Gym Backstop 1587 / 533 -- -- -- 12

9 1 20 A Rcpts - 133 540 / 533 Motorized Bleachers 20 A 3 10

7 1 20 A Rcpts - 133 900 / 1080 Rcpts - 133 20 A 1 8

5 1 20 A Rcpts - 135 1080 / 1080 Rcpts - 135 20 A 1 6

3 1 20 A Rcpt - 131 180 / 953 -- -- -- 4

1 1 20 A Card Reader 200 / 953 Washer/Dryer 125 30 A 2 2


A B C

Circuit Description

Trip Poles

CKT





Branch Panel: PPN2




Notes:




Total Conn. Load: 572 VA

Other 572 VA 100.00% 572 VA


2 A 0 A 0 A

572 VA 0 VA 0 VA

EM1A-29 -- -- Space 0 / 0 -- -- -- EM1A-30

EM1A-27 -- -- Space 0 / 0 -- -- -- EM1A-28

EM1A-25 -- -- Space 0 / 0 SPD 30 A 3 EM1A-26

EM1A-23 -- -- Space 0 / 0 Space -- -- EM1A-24








EM1A-7 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 EM1A-8



EM1A-1 1 20 A EM Lighting 572 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 EM1A-2


Phase A(VA)

Phase B(VA)

Phase C(VA)

Circuit Description

Trip Poles

CKT





Branch Panel: EM1A

1

4




Notes:





Other 0 VA 0.00% 0 VA


2 A 9 A 9 A

180 VA 953 VA 953 VA

23 -- -- Space 0 / 0 -- -- -- 24

21 -- -- Space 0 / 0 -- -- -- 22

19 -- -- Space 0 / 0 SPD 30 A 3 20

17 -- -- Space 0 / 0 Space -- -- 18

15 -- -- Space 0 / 0 Space -- -- 16

13 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 14

11 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 12

9 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 10

7 1 20 A Spare 0 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 8

5 -- -- -- 953 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 6

3 2 30 A IDF 953 / 0 Spare 20 A 1 4

1 1 20 A F.A. Extender Panel 0 / 180 Rcpt - IDF 126A 20 A 1 2


Phase A(VA)

Phase B(VA)

Phase C(VA)

Circuit Description

Trip Poles

CKT



Supply From: T1 Phases: 3 Mains Type: MCB


Branch Panel: EML

4


1 Addendum #1 01/05/2018

4 Addendum #4 01/26/2018

OS OS

OS OS

OS

OS

OS

OS OS

OS OS

OS

OS OS OS OS

NX

PP

CP

PP

US

US

US

US

GTD

CP

CP

GTD

OS

CP

US

US

GTD

CP

OS

OS

CP

OS

OSCP

OS

CP

PP PP PP

OS OS OS

OSOSOS

PP PP

PP

OS

OS OS

NX

NX

CP

OS

OS

OS

PP

OS

OS

PP

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

CP GTD

PP

CP GTD

CN GTD

OS

OS

OS

OS

CNGTD

OS

CN

GTD

CN

GTD

OS

CP

OS OS

CP

CP

CP

PP

OS

OS

OS OS

OS

OS

CP

PPPP

MA

TC

HL

INE

AR

EA

'D'

MA

TC

HL

INE

AR

EA

'E'

MA

TC

HL

INE

AR

EA

'D'

MA

TC

HL

INE

AR

EA

'E'

281.2

PRAC.

281.3

PRAC.

CORRIDOR

COMPUTER ROOM

230

297GIRLS

CLASSROOM

228

CORRIDOR

261

229

CLASSROOM S11

227

CLASSROOM

BAND ROOM282

258

281

CHORAL ROOM

259

CO

RR

IDO

R286.1

OFFICE

LARGE GROUP

LOBBY

STOR.

S10

260

225

CLASSROOM286.2

OFFICE

286

STOR.

295

294

CL.STAGE

288

S9

WRKRM

BOYS

257

CORRIDOR

282

282.1

OFFICE

285

284GIRLS

PERFORMING

COMPUTER

WRKRM

280.1

281.4

OFF.

ARTS

280

283

287

291

TOILET

293

MAKE-UP

292

TOILET

MAKE-UP

290

287.1

VEST

289

PROPS

226

CLASSROOM

MEZZANINE

RIGHT

MEZZANINE

LEFT

CORRIDOR 261

E1

E1

E1

E1

E1

E1

E1

E1

E1

E1

E1

E1E1E1

F F F F FF F F F F F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

FFF F F

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Ba

Ba

Ba

Ba

Ba

Ba

Ba

Ba

Ba

Ba

K1 K1 K1

K1

K1

K

K

K1

K1

K

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Ba

Ba

Ba

Ba

Ba

Ba

Ba

Ba

Ba

Ba

Ba

Ba

Ba

Ba

Ba

Ba

Ba

Ba

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

B B B B

K

K

K

K

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

K K K K

Db Db Db Db Db Db

Db Db Db Db Db Db

Db Db Db Db Db Db

Db Db Db Db Db Db

Da Da Da Da Da Da

Da Da Da Da Da Da

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Aa Aa Aa

Aa Aa Aa

AaAa Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Aa

Aa

Aa

FFFF

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

AaAa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Aa

Bb

Bb

Bb

Bb

Aa

Kc Kc Kc Kb Ka

KaKbKcKcKc

Kc Kc Kc Kb Ka

Ka

Kb

KcKc

Kc

N

N

N

C1 C1 C1

C1C1C1

C1 C1 C1

K1

N N

F F F F

K K

FFFF

C1C1

C1C1 C1

C1 C1

BB

LL LLLL LL LL

P

P

Fc

Fc

Fc

Fc Fc

N N

FF

N

H H

H

H

H

H

N N

N

J

N

K1

F

F

K1

K1 K1 K1 K1

N N N

J

J

J

J

FF

P

CC CC

D D

D D

F

F

D

D

D D

N

N

N

P

Kb

Kb

Kb

Kb

J

J

CC

CC

CC

CC

F

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

NNN

N

J

CC

CC

CC

J1

J1

CC

CC

CC

J

FF

G

G

SB2

SB2

E

TRe

DOWN TOSWITCH

DOWN TOEMERGENCYLIGHTING

UP TO FIXTURE

LIGHTEMERGENCYUP TO

UP TOMEZZANINELIGHTS

DOWN TOSWITCH

22

11

1

UP TOMEZZANINELIGHTS DOWN TO

SWITCH

TO EX. CANOPYFIXTURE TYPE 'E'CIRCUIT.

A

B

DDDD

B

B

B

B

B

C

B

C

D

B

B

C

A

B

B

DD

B

D D D

B

B

B B

B

B B

B

D

K

I

B

D

B

D

B

D

B B

B

D

A

I

I

B

B

D

D

B

B

A

A

A

A

B

D

DD

D

B

B

I

D

C

B

B

C

B CB

B

D

D

B

C

BC

B

C

B

B

B

D

D

C

F

C

B

B

S

S

S3

S3

S

S

SK3SK3

SK3

SK3SK3

SLV

S3 S3

S

S

S3

SK

3

S

S3

SK

SK

3

SK3

S3S3

S3

S3

S3

S

S3

S3

S

S

LV

LV

c ca

S S

LV

LV

ba

K

K

K

SbSaLVLV

SbSaLVLV

SbSaLVLV

Sb

Sa

LVLVS

bS

a

LVLVS

bS

a

LVLV

SLV

S LV

S S

LV

LV

ab

S

LV

S LV

a

S LV

b

S

S3

SLV

aS

LV

bS

LV

cS

LV

aS

LV

bS

LV

c

NX AREA CONTROLLER

1

1

1

4

4

CODED LIGHTING NOTES:

RE-USE EXISTING EMERGENCY ONLY CIRCUIT.

RE-USE EXISTING CIRCUIT.

RE-USE EXISTING NORMAL EMERGENCY CIRCUIT.

RE-USE EXISTING CIRCUITRY BETWEEN FIXTURES ANDSWITCHES IN THIS AREA UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.

PROVIDE HUBBELL WASP2 HIGH BAY OCCUPANCY SENSORCATALOG NUMBER WASPSM24VLWO. DISABLE DAYLIGHTSENSOR.

RE-USE EXISTING NORMAL EMERGENCY WIRING. REPLACEEXISTING LINE VOLTAGE PHOTOCELL ON ROOF WITH NEW. E.C.TO FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF PHOTOCELL.

CIRCUIT TO NEAREST AVAILABLE NORMAL EMERGENCYCIRCUIT.

CIRCUIT TO EXISTING SPARE IN PANEL 'FHNE' AS INDICATED.

RE-USE EXISTING CIRCUITRY BETWEEN NORMAL POWERLIGHTING FIXTURES AND SWITCHES ONLY IN THIS AREA.PROVIDE NEW CIRCUITING BETWEEN NORMAL EMERGENCYFIXTURES. PROVIDE NEW CIRCUITING BETWEEN SELECTNORMAL POWER LIGHTING FIXTURES AS INDICATED.

RE-USE EXISTING NORMAL EMERGENCY CIRCUIT. REMOVE ALLEMERGENCY ONLY CIRCUITRY.

PROVIDE NEW WIRING. CIRCUIT TO EXISTING BREAKER NEH-3THROUGH A NEW LINE VOLTAGE PHOTOCELL MOUNTED ONROOF. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT.

PROVIDE HUBBELL NXPS LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL CAT# NXP-08-2-083L WITH (8) NON-DIMMING RELAYS. PROVIDE CAT. 6NETWORK CONNECTION TO NEAREST IDF FOR BASINTEGRATION. CIRCUIT ALL NORMAL POWER NATATORIUMLIGHTING THROUGH LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL. EXTENDNEAREST RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT TO RELAY PANEL.

RECONNECT TO NEW GUH USING EXISTING CIRCUIT.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

1

N

4

GENERAL LIGHTING NOTES:

1. REFER TO DRAWING E000 FOR LEGEND AND GENERAL DRAWINGSNOTES.

2. A NUMBER NEXT TO AN OCCUPANCY SENSOR, ULTRA SONICSENSOR, OR CONTROL PACK INDICATES WHICH LOCAL CONTROLS

IT WILL BE CIRCUITED WITH. IF NO NUMBER IS INDICATED, CIRCUIT TOTHE LOCAL ROOM CONTROLS.

3. ALL PHOTOCELLS SHALL BE WIRED SUCH THAT FAILURE OF THEPHOTOCELL WILL ENERGIZE THE LIGHTING CIRCUIT.

4. WHERE BLANK SPOTS ARE LEFT IN SWITCH BACKBOXES PROVIDEBLANK PLATE.

5. CIRCUIT ALL EXIT SIGNS TO THE NEAREST AVILABLE LIFE SAFETYCIRCUIT UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.

6. CAMERAS FURNISHED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY E.C. E.C. TOPROVIDE BACKBOXES, CABLING, AND CONDUIT AS REQUIRED.COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS WITH OWNER. CAMERA VENDOR ISBILL LAWRENCE WITH CM3. PHONE:215-970-4041EMAIL:[email protected]

7. E.C. SHALL EXTEND EXISTING PA SYSTEM. COORDINATE WITHEXISTING PA SYSTEM.

8. E.C. IS RESPONSIBILE FOR PATCHING CEILING WHERE NEWDOWNLIGHTS ARE INSTALLED TO MATCH EXISTING SURFACES.INCLUDE 'GOOF' RINGS WHERE NEW FIXTURE DIAMETER IS 1"SMALLER OR LESS THAN EXISTING FIXTURE. PATCH CEILING WHERENEW FIXTURE DIAMETER IS MORE THAN 1" SMALLER THAN EXISTING.

1

4

NN

0'

2'

4'

8'

16'

32'


Consultants:

Professional Seal:

Owner:

Drawing Title:

Drawing Number:

DATE:

SGA PROJECT NUMBER:

ISSUED FOR:


True Project

New

Constr

uctio

n o

f:


Key Plan:

G

B CE

D

F

A

E111

SECOND FLOOR PLAN -LIGHTING - AREA 'E'

SD

ST

HIG

H S

CH

OO

LA

DD

ITIO

N &

RE

NO

VA

TIO

NS

1801 E

AS

T P

AP

ER

MIL

L R

OA

D,

ER

DE

NH

EIM

, P

A 1

9038

12/11/2017

16-020.3


Civil:

MEP:

Structural Engineer




Renew Design Group


SchraderGroup

p: 215.622.1109

p: 610.694.8020

p: 717.299.8965

1/8" = 1'-0"E111

1 SECOND FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING - AREA 'E'


1 Addendum #1 01/05/2018

4 Addendum #4 01/26/2018

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

S

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

MA

TC

HL

INE

AR

EA

'C'

MA

TC

HL

INE

AR

EA

'G'

MATC

HLIN

E AREA

'D'

MATC

HLIN

E AREA

'G'

MATCHLINE AREA 'B'

MATCHLINE AREA 'C'

EX. 14"x6"

EX

. 16"x

8"

EX. 30"x14"

EX

. 34"x

10"

S/A

EX

. 22"x

10"

EX

. 48"x

12"

EX. 10"x6"

REMOVE EX. 58"x12" R/ADN. TO EX. AHU.

REMOVE EX. 58"x23"S/A DN. TO EX. AHU.

REMOVE EX. 2" CWS & CWR

REMOVE EX. 1" HWS & HWR

REMOVE EX. 1 1/4" CDEX. 12"x6" S/A,TYPICAL FOR 2.

REMOVE EX.T/A GRILLE.

EX. 16"x8"

EX. 14"x6" S/A,TYPICAL FOR 2.

EX. 30"x10" S/A

EX. 34"x10"

REMOVE EX. AIR HANDLING UNIT ANDASSOCIATED CONTROLS, DUCTWORK,& PIPING (AS INDICATED). G.C SHALLREMOVE EX. CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPINGPAD AND LEVEL FLOOR.

REMOVE EX. 72"x10" R/A BOOT.

REMOVE EX. 40"x40" R/A UPTHROUGH ROOF TO EX. RTU.

EX. 14"x7" S/A

EX. 12"x6"

EX. 14"x10"

EX. 24"x14"

EX. 16"x10"

REMOVEEX. 24"x12"T/A & ASSOC.GRILLE.

REMOVE EX.48"x12" O/A ANDEX. OUTSIDE AIRINTAKE (ON ROOF).CAP EX. ROOF CURB.

REMOVE EX. DUCTLESSSPLIT SYSTEM AND ASSOC.REFRIGERANT PIPING. EX.CONDENSATE TO REMAIN.

1 1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

2

2

2

2

2

2

1

1

1

EX. 14"x6"




REMOVE EX.HWS, HWR, CWS, &CWR TO THIS POINT.

REMOVE EX. 14"x6"S/A & 14"x6" R/A

REMOVE EX. 25"x10"S/A TO THIS POINT.



REMOVE EX.18"x8" S/A TOTHIS POINT.



EX. 24"x12"

EX

. 16"x

10"

S/A

EX

. 18"x

10"

S/A

EX

. 22"x

12"

S/A

EX

. 26"x

12"

EX

. 36"x

12"

S/A

EX

. 18"x

8"

EX. 20"x10" S/A EX. 12"x8"

EX. 25"x10" S/A

EX

. 15"x

10"

EX

. 25"x

10"

EX. 26"x6"

EX. 12 1/2"x10"

EX

. 24"x

10"

EX

. 14"x

10"

EX. 14"x6"

EX. 17"x10" S/AEX. 12"x6"

EX. 26"x6" EX. 25"x10" S/A

EX. FD/AP

EX. 10"x6" E/A

EX. 11/2" CWS & CWR

UP THROUGH FLOOR.

EX. 3/4" HWS & HWRUP THROUGH FLOOR.

EX. 11/2" CWS & CWR

AND 3/4" HWS & HWR

DN. TO EX. UNIT

VENTILATOR

EX. 11/2" CWS & CWR

UP THROUGH FLOOR.


EX. 3/4" HWS & HWR DN.TO EX. RADIATION.

EX. 3/4" HWS & HWR UPTHROUGH FLOOR.

EX. RADIATION, TYPICAL

EX. 1 1/2" CWS & CWRAND 3/4" HWS & HWR DN.TO EX. UNIT VENTILATOR

EX. 1 1/2" CWS & CWRUP THROUGH FLOOR.


EX. 3/4" HWR UPTHROUGH FLOOR.

EX. 3/4" HWS UPTHROUGH FLOOR.

EX. CABINET HEATER,TYPICAL.

EX. 3/4" HWS& HWR

EX. 3/4"

EX. 3/4" HWS & HWR

EX. 10"x6" S/A

EX. 2"

EX. 24"x12" T/A W/ FD

EX. 3/4" HWS& HWR

EX. 3/4" HWS & HWR DN.TO EX. CONVECTOR.

EX. 10"x8" E/A

EX. 3/4" HWS& HWR

EX. 1"

EX. 2"

EX. 24"x12" T/A W/ FD

EX. 12"x6" T/A W/FD

EX. 10"x6" S/A

EX. 1"

EX. 1 1/2"

EX. 1 1/4"

EX. 11/2" CWS & CWR AND

3/4" HWS & HWR DN. TO

EX. UNIT VENTILATOR


EX. 1 1/2" CWS & CWR UPTHROUGH FLOOR.

EX. 5" CWS& CWR

EX. 4" HWS& HWR

EX

. 15"x

10"

EX

. 18"x

8"

EX

. 16"x

8"

EX

. 16"x

8"


EX. 3/4" HWS& HWR UPTHROUGHFLOOR.


EX. T/A GRILLE,TYPICAL






EX. 12 1/2"x10"

EX. 36"x12"

EX. 3/4"

EX. 18"x10"

EX. 16"x4" E/A DN.TO DISHWASHER


EX. 18"x18" UP THROUGHROOF TO EX. EXHAUST FAN.

EX. 28"x12" E/A

EX. 16"x9" E/A,TYPICAL FOR 2.

EX. 14"x12"

EX. EXHAUST FAN(ON ROOF)

EX. 12"x8"


EX. 14"x7"

EX. 14"x7"

EX. 12"x6"

EX. 10"x6" S/A

EX. EXHAUSTFAN

EX. FD

EX. FD

EX. 1"

EX. 2"

EX. 5" CWS& CWR

EX. 4" HWS& HWR

EX. 20"x14"T/A W/ FD

EX. 1"

EX. 2"

EX. 5" CWS& CWR

EX. 4" HWS& HWR



EX. UNIT VENTILATOR &

EX. RADIATION.

EX. RADIATION,TYPICAL.

EX. 14"x8" S/A



EX. 14"x10" S/A

EX. FD

EX. 10"x6" S/A



EX. CABINET HEATER

EX. 3/4" HWS & HWR DN.TO EX. CABINET HEATER.

EX. 2" HWS & HWR UPTHROUGH EX. FLOOR


EX. 20"x8"T/A W/ FD

EX. EXHAUST FAN

EX. 24"x12" E/APLENUM & LOUVER

EX. 16"x8"

EX. SPEEDCONTROLLER

EX. 14"x10"

EX. FD



EX. UNIT VENTILATOR.



EX. UNIT VENTILATOR,TYPICAL.

EX. 1"

EX. 10"x6" S/A

EX. 10"x6" S/A

EX. FD

EX. 10"x6" T/A W/ FD EX. 1 1/4" CWS & CWRUP THROUGH FLOOR.








EX. 3/4" HWS & HWR DN.TO EX. CONVECTORS.

EX. 5" CWS & CWR

EX. 4"

EX. 2 1/2"

EX. 3"

EX. 3/4"

EX. 4" CWS & CWRAND 3" HWS &HWR UP N CHASE.

EX. 16"x8" T/A W/ FD

EX. 8"x4" E/A

EX. 12"x6" E/A

EX. FD


EX. 18"x8" E/AEX. 4"

EX. FD

EX. 54"x16"W/ FD

EX. 12"x8"

EX. 24"x18" S/A UPTHROUGH FLOOR.

EX. 48"x18" RELIEF UPTHROUGH FLOOR.

EX. 18"x18" E/A UPTHROUGH FLOOR.

EX. 18"x18"

EX. 40"x12"

EX.1 1/2"

EX. 8"x6"

EX. 3/4" HWS & HWRDN. TO EX. CONVECTOR.

EX. 2"


EX. ATC PANELS

EX. 6" HWS& HWR

EX. 4" HWS& HWR

EX. 12"x6"

EX

. 14"x

6"

S/A

EX

. 14"x

6"

S/A

EX. 14"x6" EX. 14"x6" EX. 14"x6" EX. 14"x6"

EX. 12"x6" EX. 12"x6" EX. 12"x6"

125.1

JAN

RECEIVING137

OFFICE

147.2

CLASSROOM106

STOR105.3

CLASSROOM

105

KILN105.1

CO

RR

IDO

R1

25

STAIR

S7

CLASSROOM

104

BOYS 135

STORAGE104.10

CLASSROOM

103

LOBBY

126

STOR

134

VEST127

CLASSROOM101

STOR.133.2

CLASSROOM102

MECH.

ROOM142.1

DISHWASH

140.6

CAFETERIA138

SERVING138.1

FACULTY

DINING139

OFFICE

133.1

SCHOOL

STORE

IDF

4

4

KEYED DEMOLITION NOTES

1 REMOVE EX. TEMPERATURE SENSOR.

2 REMOVE EX. CONTROLLER, DAMPER ACTUATORS,AND 3-WAY ATC VALVES. EX. DAMPERS TO REMAIN.

3 REMOVE EX. ELECTRIC DUCT COIL AND ASSOCIATEDCONTROLS. REMOVE EX. DUCTWORK AS INDICATED.

4 REMOVE EX. 3-WAY ATC VALVES. EX. CONTROLLER,ACTUATORS, AND DAMPERS TO REMAIN.

5 EX. TEMPERATURE AND C02 SENSOR TO REMAIN.

6 EX. TEMPERATURE SENSOR TO REMAIN.

7 REMOVE EX. SUPPLY AIR FAN MOTOR AND 3-WAYATC VALVES. EX. ROOFTOP UNIT TO REMAIN.

8 REMOVE EX. SUPPLY AIR FAN AND MOTORASSEMBLY. REMOVE EX. 3-WAY ATC VALVES.EX. ROOFTOP UNIT TO REMAIN.

9 REMOVE EX. ROOFTOP UNIT AND ASSOCIATEDCONTROLS, DUCTWORK, AND PIPING (AS INDICATED).CAP EX. ROOF CURB.

10 REMOVE EX. ROOFTOP UNIT AND ASSOCIATEDCONTROLS, DUCTWORK, AND PIPING (AS INDICATED).REMOVE EX. ROOF CURB. ROOF PATCHING AROUNDNEW ROOF CURB BY G.C. REFER TO NEW WORK PLANSFOR NEW ROOF CURB DIMENSIONS.

NOTE: ALL EXISTING EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK, AND PIPINGSHALL BE TO REMAIN UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

NN

0'

2'

4'

8'

16'

32'


Consultants:

Professional Seal:

Owner:

Drawing Title:

Drawing Number:

DATE:

SGA PROJECT NUMBER:

ISSUED FOR:


True Project

New

Constr

uctio

n o

f:


Key Plan:

G

B CE

D

F

A

MD105

FIRST FLOOR DEMOLITIONPLAN - AREA G - MECHANICAL

SD

ST

HIG

H S

CH

OO

LA

DD

ITIO

N &

RE

NO

VA

TIO

NS

1801 E

AS

T P

AP

ER

MIL

L R

OA

D,

ER

DE

NH

EIM

, P

A 1

9038

DECEMBER 11, 2017

16-020.3


Civil:

MEP:

Structural Engineer




Renew Design Group

Snyder Hoffman Assoc., Inc.

SchraderGroup

p: 215.622.1109

p: 610.694.8020

p: 717.299.8965

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"MD105 SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

1 FIRST FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA G - MECHANICAL


4 ADDENDUM #4 01/26/2018

T

T T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

MA

TC

HL

INE

AR

EA

'G'

MA

TC

HL

INE

AR

EA

'F'

MA

TC

HL

INE

AR

EA

'C'

MA

TC

HL

INE

AR

EA

'G'

MATC

HLIN

E AREA

'D'

MATC

HLIN

E AREA

'G'

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

1

1

1

1

6

6

6

6

6

6

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

6

6

6

6

6

1

4

44

1

6 6

6

1

44

8

1

2

REMOVE EX. CONDENSINGUNIT AND ASSOCIATEDREFRIGERANT PIPING.

10

EX

. 18"x

12"

EX

. 12"x

8"

EX

. 12"x

8"

EX. 14"x10"

EX. 24"x10"

EX. 12"x10"

EX. 14"x14"

EX

. 24"x

10"

EX. 12"x12"

EX

. 10"x

10"

EX. 12"x12"

EX

. 20"x

14"

S/A

EX

. 16"x

8"

S/A

EX

. 14"x

8"

S/A

EX. 16"x8"

EX. 1 1/2" CWS & CWRAND 3/4" HWS & HWR DN.THROUGH FLOOR.


EX. UNIT VENTILATOR,TYPICAL

EX. 3/4" HWS & HWR DN.THROUGH FLOOR.

EX. 8"x6" S/A

EX. FD

EX. 50"x20" R/A UP THROUGHROOF TO EX. RTU.


EX. 3/4" HWS DN.THROUGH FLOOR.

EX. 3/4" HWR DN.THROUGH FLOOR.


EX. 10"x5" T/A,TYPICAL FOR 2.

EX. 10"x8"T/A W/ FD


EX. ROOFTOP UNIT (ON ROOF)

EX. 1" HWS & HWR UPTHROUGH ROOF TO EX. RTU.

EX. 18"x9"T/A W/ FD

EX. 2" CWS & CWR UPTHROUGH ROOF TO EX. RTU.

EX. 16"x6" S/A, TYPICAL FOR 2.

EX. 16"x10" S/AEX. FD





EX. 48"x90" UP THROUGHROOF TO EX. GV.

EX. GRAVITY RELIEFVENT (ON ROOF).








EX

. 14"x

8"

S/A

EX. TRANSFER AIRGRILLE, TYPICAL

EX

. 14"x

8"

S/A





EX. 12"x8" S/A

EX. 12"x12" S/A

EX. RADIATION,TYPICAL


EX. 14"x8"

EX. UNIT VENTILATORS



EX. 1 1/4" CWS & CWRAND 3/4" HWS & HWR DN.TO EX. UNIT VENTILATOR.



EX. 1 1/2"

EX. 3/4" EX. 1 1/2"

EX. 3/4"

EX. 3" CWS & CWR

EX. 3" HWS & HWR

EX. 12"x8" S/A

EX. 8"x4" T/A


EX. 8"x6"

EX. FD

EX. 12"x12" S/A

EX. 12"x8" S/A

EX. 4" CWS & CWR AND 3"HWS & HWR DN. IN CHASE



EX. 16"x8"T/A W/ FD

EX. 20"x12" S/A


EX. 18"x18" E/A UPTHROUGH ROOF TO EX. EF.



EX. EXHAUST FAN (ON ROOF)

EX. 10"x10" T/A,TYPICAL FOR 2.


EX. E/A DUCTWORK

EX. 24"x18" S/A DN. IN CHASE

EX. 48"x18" RELIEF DN. IN CHASE.

EX. 18"x8" E/A DN. IN CHASE.

EX. FD

EX. 59"x25" S/A UP THROUGHROOF TO EX. RTU.

EX. 10"x8"

EX. 3/4" HWS& HWR DN.THROUGHFLOOR.

EX. 3/4" HWR DN.THROUGH FLOOR.



EX. VAV BOX,TYPICAL

EX. 24"x24"

EX. 24"x18"

EX. 24"x10"

EX. 10"

EX. 16"x14"

EX. 10" S/A,TYPICAL FOR 4.

EX. 14"x12"

EX. 8" S/A,TYPICAL FOR 2.

EX. 6"

EX. 10"

EX. 6"

EX. 10"

EX. 10"x8"

EX. 12"x14"

EX. 16"x14"

EX. 10"x8"

EX. 12"x12" E/A UP THROUGHROOF TO EX. EF.

EX. EXHAUST FAN (ON ROOF)

EX. 10"x6" T/A

EX. 10"x6"

EX. 12"x8"

EX. 10"x10"

EX. 3/4" HWS& HWR DN.THROUGHFLOOR.

EX. CONVECTOR

EX. 16"x6" E/ADN. THROUGHFLOOR.

EX. 12"x12"

EX. CONVECTOR

EX. CONVECTOR

EX. RADIATION.

EX. RADIATION




EX. CONVECTOR

EX. ATC PANEL


EX. FD


EX. FUME HOOD,TYPICAL FOR 3.

EX. DUCTLESSSPLIT SYSTEM


WORKROOM

OFFICE

STAIR

S8

STAIR

S7

STOR.

210.1

WORKROOM210.2

CO

RR

IDO

R

353

OFFICE

209.1

TOILET276

TOILET

275

GIRLS

272

OFFICE208.1

CORRIDOR254

CLASSROOM212 CLASSROOM

211

CLASSROOM

210

CLASSROOM202

CLASSROOM203

CLASSROOM201

CLASSROOM204

CLASSROOM205

CLASSROOM

206

CLASSROOM

207

OFFICE

277

CLASSROOM

208CLASSROOM209

4

4

KEYED DEMOLITION NOTES

1 REMOVE EX. TEMPERATURE SENSOR.

2 REMOVE EX. CONTROLLER, DAMPER ACTUATORS,AND 3-WAY ATC VALVES. EX. DAMPERS TO REMAIN.

3 REMOVE EX. ELECTRIC DUCT COIL AND ASSOCIATEDCONTROLS. REMOVE EX. DUCTWORK AS INDICATED.

4 REMOVE EX. 3-WAY ATC VALVES. EX. CONTROLLER,ACTUATORS, AND DAMPERS TO REMAIN.

5 EX. TEMPERATURE AND C02 SENSOR TO REMAIN.

6 EX. TEMPERATURE SENSOR TO REMAIN.

7 REMOVE EX. SUPPLY AIR FAN MOTOR AND 3-WAYATC VALVES. EX. ROOFTOP UNIT TO REMAIN.

8 REMOVE EX. SUPPLY AIR FAN AND MOTORASSEMBLY. REMOVE EX. 3-WAY ATC VALVES.EX. ROOFTOP UNIT TO REMAIN.

9 REMOVE EX. ROOFTOP UNIT AND ASSOCIATEDCONTROLS, DUCTWORK, AND PIPING (AS INDICATED).CAP EX. ROOF CURB.

10 REMOVE EX. ROOFTOP UNIT AND ASSOCIATEDCONTROLS, DUCTWORK, AND PIPING (AS INDICATED).REMOVE EX. ROOF CURB. ROOF PATCHING AROUNDNEW ROOF CURB BY G.C. REFER TO NEW WORK PLANSFOR NEW ROOF CURB DIMENSIONS.

NOTE: ALL EXISTING EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK, AND PIPINGSHALL BE TO REMAIN UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

NN

0'

2'

4'

8'

16'

32'


Consultants:

Professional Seal:

Owner:

Drawing Title:

Drawing Number:

DATE:

SGA PROJECT NUMBER:

ISSUED FOR:


True Project

New

Constr

uctio

n o

f:


Key Plan:

G

B CE

D

F

A

MD111

SECOND FLOOR DEMOLITIONPLAN - AREA G - MECHANICAL

SD

ST

HIG

H S

CH

OO

LA

DD

ITIO

N &

RE

NO

VA

TIO

NS

1801 E

AS

T P

AP

ER

MIL

L R

OA

D,

ER

DE

NH

EIM

, P

A 1

9038

DECEMBER 11, 2017

16-020.3


Civil:

MEP:

Structural Engineer




Renew Design Group


SchraderGroup

p: 215.622.1109

p: 610.694.8020

p: 717.299.8965

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"MD111 SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

1 SECOND FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA G - MECHANICAL


4 ADDENDUM #4 01/26/2018

S

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

TT

T

T

T

T

T

EX

220CFM

EX

210CFM

EX

200CFM

EX

210CFM

EX

340CFM

EX

340CFM

EX

340CFM

EX

340CFM

EX

340CFM

EX

340CFM

EX

325CFM

EX

340CFM

EX

325CFM

EX

320CFM

EX340CFM

EX

320CFM EX

340CFM

EX

270CFM

EX270CFM

EX

270CFM EX

270CFM

EX

270CFM

20

275CFM

20

275CFM

20

250CFM

20

250CFM

20

275CFM

20

275CFM

EX

450CFM

EX

500CFM

EX

450CFM

EX

450CFM

22

450CFM

22500CFM

150CFM

EX

200CFM

EX

350CFM

EX

350CFM

EX

200CFM

EX

200CFM

EX

400CFM

EX

200CFM

18

180CFM

EX 100CFM

EX

EX 150CFM

1

4

4

4

18

200CFM

1

24

150CFM

23

4

VAV4-1

VAV4-2

VAV4-3

VAV4-4

VAV4-5

VAV4-6

VAV4-7

VAV8-1

VAV8-2

VAV8-3

VAV8-4

VAV8-6

FPV8-1

FPV

8-2

VAV

8-7

VAV8-8

VAV8-5

VAV4-17

DSS3

MA

TC

HL

INE

AR

EA

'C'

MA

TC

HL

INE

AR

EA

'G'

MATC

HLIN

E AREA

'D'

MATC

HLIN

E AREA

'G'

MATCHLINE AREA 'B'

MATCHLINE AREA 'C'

EX

. 16"x

10"

S/A

EX

. 18"x

10"

S/A

EX

. 22"x

12"

S/A

EX

. 26"x

12"

EX

. 36"x

12"

S/A

EX

. 18"x

8"

EX. 20"x10" S/A EX. 12"x8"

EX

. 15"x

10"

EX

. 24"x

10"

EX

. 14"x

10"

EX. 14"x6"

EX. 17"x10" S/AEX. 12"x6"

EX. 25"x10" S/A

EX. FD/AP

EX. 10"x6" E/A

EX. 11/2" CWS & CWR

UP THROUGH FLOOR.




EX. UNIT VENTILATOR

EX. 11/2" CWS & CWR

UP THROUGH FLOOR.










EX. CABINET HEATER,TYPICAL.

EX. 3/4" HWS& HWR

EX. 3/4"

EX. 3/4" HWS & HWR

EX. 10"x6" S/A

EX. 2" EX. 24"x12" T/A W/ FD

EX. 3/4" HWS& HWR


EX. 10"x8" E/A

EX. 3/4" HWS& HWR

EX. 1"

EX. 2"

EX. 24"x12" T/A W/ FD

EX. 12"x6" T/A W/FD

EX. 10"x6" S/A

EX. 1"

EX. 1 1/4"



EX. UNIT VENTILATOR



EX. 5" CWS& CWR

EX. 4" HWS& HWR

EX

. 15"x

10"

EX

. 18"x

8"

EX

. 16"x

8"

EX

. 16"x

8"






EX. T/A GRILLE,TYPICAL






EX. 12 1/2"x10"

EX. 3/4"

EX. 18"x10"

EX. 16"x4" E/A DN.TO DISHWASHER


EX. 18"x18" UP THROUGHROOF TO EX. EXHAUST FAN.

EX. 28"x12" E/A


EX. 14"x12"

EX. EXHAUST FAN(ON ROOF)

EX. 12"x8"


EX. 12"x6"

EX. 14"x7"EX. 12"x6"

EX. 10"x6"

EX. FD

EX. FD

EX. 1"

EX. 2"

EX. 5" CWS& CWR

EX. 4" HWS& HWR


EX. 1"

EX. 2"

EX. 5" CWS& CWR

EX. 4" HWS& HWR



EX. UNIT VENTILATOR &

EX. RADIATION.

EX. RADIATION,TYPICAL.

EX. 14"x8" S/A



EX. 14"x10" S/A

EX. FD

EX. 10"x6" S/A



EX. CABINET HEATER

EX. 3/4" HWS & HWR DN.TO EX. CABINET HEATER.

EX. 2" HWS & HWR UPTHROUGH EX. FLOOR


EX. 20"x8"T/A W/ FD

EX. EXHAUST FAN

EX. 24"x12" E/APLENUM & LOUVER

EX. SPEEDCONTROLLER



EX. UNIT VENTILATOR.




EX. 10"x6" S/A

EX. 10"x6" T/A W/ FD EX. 1 1/4" CWS & CWRUP THROUGH FLOOR.








EX. 3/4" HWS & HWR DN.TO EX. CONVECTORS.

EX. 5" CWS & CWR

EX. 4"

EX. 2 1/2"

EX. 3/4"

EX. 4" CWS & CWRAND 3" HWS &HWR UP N CHASE.


EX. 8"x4" E/A

EX. 12"x6" E/A

EX. FD


EX. 18"x8" E/AEX. 4"

EX. FD

EX. 24"x18" S/A UPTHROUGH FLOOR.

EX. 48"x18" RELIEF UPTHROUGH FLOOR.

EX. 18"x18" E/A UPTHROUGH FLOOR.

EX. 18"x18"

EX. 40"x12"

EX.1 1/2"

EX. 8"x6"

EX. 25"x10" S/A


EX. 1"

EX. 2"


EX. ATC PANELS

24"x12" AL T/A

EX. 1 1/2"

EX. 3"

EX. FD

EX. 10"x6" S/A

EX. 6" HWS& HWR

EX. 4" HWS& HWR

EX. 10"x6" S/A

EX. 14"x10"

EX. 30"x10" S/A

EX. 18"x8"

EX. 14"x7" S/A

EX. 25"x10" S/A

EX

. 25"x

10"

EX. 26"x6"

EX. 12 1/2"x10" EX. 26"x6"

EX. 16"x8"

EX

. 14"x

6"

S/A

EX

. 14"x

6"

S/A

EX. 14"x6" EX. 14"x6" EX. 14"x6" EX. 14"x6"

EX. 12"x6" EX. 12"x6" EX. 12"x6" EX. 12"x6"

EX. 54"x16"W/ FD

EX. 12"x8"

3" CWS, CWR & 2" HWS,HWR UP THROUGHROOF TO RTU-8.

EX. EXHAUSTFAN

125.1

JAN

RECEIVING137

OFFICE

147.2

CLASSROOM

106

STOR

105.3

CLASSROOM

105

KILN105.1

CO

RR

IDO

R

125

STAIR

S7

CLASSROOM

104

BOYS 135

STORAGE

104.10

CLASSROOM

103

LOBBY126

STOR134

VEST

127

CLASSROOM

101

CLASSROOM102

MECH.

ROOM142.1

DISHWASH

140.6

CAFETERIA138

SERVING

138.1

FACULTY

DINING139

STOR.133.2

OFFICE

133.1

SCHOOL

STORE

IDF

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

4

4

4

4

4

4

0.34GPM

2.70 HWGPM

1.18GPM

0.50GPM

2.11GPM

2.50 HWGPM

1.18GPM

0.50GPM

0.41GPM

2.83GPM

0.41GPM

1.55GPM

0.97GPM

0.50GPM

0.93GPM

2.70 HWGPM

2.20 HWGPM

2.20 HWGPM

2.20 HWGPM

0.93GPM

0.52GPM

375CFM

375CFM

375CFM

375CFM

375CFM

375CFM

3/4" HWS, HWRDN. TO VAV 4-3.

8

5" S/A

8" S/A

8

8

8

9

9

5" S/A

8

9

8

10"

9

9

8

9

8

8

5" S/A

6" S/A

52"x16" S/A

24"x

14"

14" S/A

8" S/A

24"x12"14" S/A

44"x

14"

S/A

14" S/A

14" S/A

14"

14"

24"x10"

14"x8"

14"x8"

14"x7"

36"x

14"

S/A

20"x

14"

S/A

14"

16"x14" S/A

16"x8" AL S/A 24"x10" AL

14"x

6"

AL

12"x

6"

AL

14"x

6"

AL

14"

6" S/A

5" S/A

10"x

6"

AL

10"x6" AL T/A

16"x8" AL

5" S/A6" S/A

10"x

6"

AL

10"x6" AL T/A

10"x

6"

AL S

/A

10"x6" AL T/A

52"x16" S/A UPTHROUGH ROOFTO RTU-8.

60"x26" AL R/A UPTHROUGH ROOFTO RTU-8.

SDSD

14.48 CW

GPM

14.48 CW

GPM

14.48 CWGPM

17.00 CW

GPM

14.48 CWGPM 17.00 CW

GPM

24"x12" AL

14"x6" AL

14"x6" AL

24"x10"

2" HWS & HWR

12"x6" AL

3/4" HWS& HWR

1" HWS, HWR

3/4" HWS, HWR

3/4" HWS, HWR

3/4"HWS,HWR

1-1/4" HWS, HWR

1-1/2" HWS, HWR

3/4" HWS, HWR

1-1/2"HWS,HWR

3/4" HWS,HWR

3/4" HWS& HWR

3/4" HWS, HWR

3/4" HWS& HWR

3/4" HWS& HWR

3/4" HWS& HWR

3/4" HWS & HWR

3/4" HWS & HWR

CONNECT 1 1/4" TRAPPEDCD W/ SPEARS PVC SWINGCHECK VALVE TO EX. CD INWALL.

RS & RL PIPING UPTHROUGH ROOF TO CU-3.

1

11

11

211

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

4

4

KEYED NOTES

1 NEW TEMPERATURE SENSOR IN EXISTING LOCATION.

2 NEW TEMPERATURE AND C02 SENSOR. MOUNT CO2SENSOR DIRECTLY ABOVE TEMPERATURE SENSOR.

3 PROVIDE NEW SUPPLY AIR FAN & MOTOR ASSEMBLYAS SCHEDULED. PROVIDE NEW 2-WAY ATC VALVES.REBALANCE SUPPLY AIR, OUTSIDE AIR, HOT WATERCOIL, AND CHILLED WATER COIL TO FLOWS INDICATED.

4 PROVIDE NEW CONTROLLER, DAMPER ACTUATORS,AND 2-WAY ATC VALVES. REBALANCE OUTSIDE AIRDAMPER, HOT WATER COIL AND CHILLED WATER COILTO FLOWS INDICATED.

5 PROVIDE NEW 2-WAY ATC VALVES. REBALANCEOUTSIDE AIR DAMPER, HOT WATER AND CHILLEDWATER COILS TO FLOWS INDICATED.

NOTE: REBALANCE ALL EXISTING GRILLES, REGISTERS,AND DIFFUSERS TO AIRFLOWS INDICATED.

6 PROVIDE NEW SUPPLY AIR FAN MOTOR WITH FIELDMOUNTED SHAFT GROUNDING RING AND VFD TO MATCHEX. HORSEPOWER. PROVIDE NEW 2-WAY ATC VALVES.REBALANCE SUPPLY AIR, OUTSIDE AIR, HOT WATER COIL,AND CHILLED WATER COIL TO FLOWS INDICATED.

7 NEW CO2 SENSOR. MOUNT SENSOR DIRECTLYABOVE EXISTING TEMPERATURE SENSOR.

8 REBALANCE EX. HOT WATER COIL TO FLOW INDICATED.

9 PROVIDE NEW 2-WAY ATC VALVE. REBALANCE EX. HOTWATER COIL TO FLOW INDICATED.

10 PROVIDE NEW VFD ON SUPPLY AIR AND EXHAUST AIRFAN. PROVIDE NEW O/A & E/A DAMPER AND DAMPERACTUATORS. PROVIDE NEW 2-WAY ATC VALVES.REBALANCE SUPPLY AIR, EXHAUST AIR, HOT WATERCOIL, AND CHILLED WATER COIL TO FLOWS INDICATED.

11 NEW TEMPERATURE SENSOR.

NN

0'

2'

4'

8'

16'

32'


Consultants:

Professional Seal:

Owner:

Drawing Title:

Drawing Number:

DATE:

SGA PROJECT NUMBER:

ISSUED FOR:


True Project

New

Constr

uctio

n o

f:


Key Plan:

G

B CE

D

F

A

M106

FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA G -MECHANICAL

SD

ST

HIG

H S

CH

OO

LA

DD

ITIO

N &

RE

NO

VA

TIO

NS

1801 E

AS

T P

AP

ER

MIL

L R

OA

D,

ER

DE

NH

EIM

, P

A 1

9038

DECEMBER 11, 2017

16-020.3


Civil:

MEP:

Structural Engineer




Renew Design Group


SchraderGroup

p: 215.622.1109

p: 610.694.8020

p: 717.299.8965

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"M106 SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

1 FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA G - MECHANICAL


4 ADDENDUM #4 01/26/2018